JP2018111018A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine that can give variations in a displacement mode of a displacing member while keeping an output of driving means constant.SOLUTION: When a driven member 550 is displaced by a driving motor 530, in response to the displacement of the driven member 550, a follower member 560 can be moved accordingly in a relative displacement. That means, even when the driven member 550 is displaced in a fixed orbit, the follower member 560 can be displaced in a different orbit from that of the driven member 550. Also, even when the driving motor 530 is displaced in a fixed speed rate, the follower member 560 can be displaced in an orbit different from that of the driven member 550. As the result, variations can be given to a displacement mode of the follower member 560 while the output of the driving motor 530 is kept constant.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, the liquid crystal display device displays from the overhanging position that is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device and the overhanging position by the driving force from the driving means There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position that is retreated in a direction that is outside the region (Patent Document 1). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2011-200790 (see, for example, paragraph 0095, FIGS. 11 to 15)

However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. .

  In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and the driven member. A holding member that is held so as to be displaceable, and a driven member that is connected to the driven member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement defining means that regulates displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, By defining the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member by the displacement defining means, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is relative to the driven member. Relative displacement.

  The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the displacement defining means includes a first groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the first groove portion. And a first guided portion formed on the other of the driven member or the holding member.

  A gaming machine according to a third aspect is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, whereby the driven member With this displacement, the driven member can be driven while being displaced relative to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a linear or arc-shaped fixed track, for example, the driven member can be displaced along a track different from the driven member. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced along the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is provided along the first groove portion. By guiding the part, the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (first groove part) and the part guided by the part (first guided part), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine of the first or second aspect, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state. When the driven member is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement, the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong impression change as a change of the displacement mode. it can.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation | movement unit in the state which has arrange | positioned the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member in the retracted position. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a protruding operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a connecting rod. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is an exploded back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the projecting operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting operation unit in the portion XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a driven member and a driven member, (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of a main-body part, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the main-body part which expands and shows the XXXVII part of Fig.37 (a). It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38A is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. .

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When arranged in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit housing member 300. In FIG. 5, the operation units 400 to 800 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 6, the protruding operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The state of being arranged in the extended position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 includes a rectangular bottom wall plate in front view and an outer wall plate erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion (front side in FIG. 5). The unit storage member 300 is formed in a box shape that is open on the side. The bottom plate of the unit storage member 300 is formed with an opening 301 having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The unit accommodating member 300 accommodates the projecting operation unit 400, the composite operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retracting operation unit 700, and the overhang operation unit 800 in the internal space, whereby one operation unit 200 is stored. Configured as

  The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and these displacement members 440 and 450 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base side displacement member 440 to increase the overall size, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect. The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The combined operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and these members 550 and 560 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the combined operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only a rotational motion with the predetermined position as the rotation center, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 has a linear motion. By causing the motion combined with the rotational motion to be performed, a change is imparted to the trajectory of the driven member 560 to enhance the effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotating operation unit 600 includes a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 that are arranged concentrically, and by rotating both the rotating bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate both rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of rendering the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the projecting operation unit 700 includes a projecting member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes a projecting member 810 formed so as to be rotatable, and the projecting member 710 and the projecting member 810 are provided. Is displaced or rotated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an overhanging position (not shown) that projects to the front (front side) of the opening 301 (see the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). To move (displace).

  Next, the protruding operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 sharing the case body 410 with the projecting operation unit 400 is provided side by side with the projecting operation unit 400. In addition, a pair of protruding operation units 400 are disposed on the left and right sides of the intrusion operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of protruding operation units 400 are formed symmetrically. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the projecting operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 having a skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and the drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, and crank gear 433) that transmit the rotational driving force, a base side displacement member 440 that is rotatably supported by case body 410, and a slide displacement to base side displacement member 440 A relative displacement member 450 that can be disposed, and a connection rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and is rotatably supported by the case body 410 are mainly configured. The

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a housing recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (respective gears 431, 432, and 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side of FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side of FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In this embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as will be described later, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, the gears 431, 432, and 433, Are stacked in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is provided in front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively. Thus, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is engaged with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is engaged with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported on the case body 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 is formed with a radial decoration on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that the teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  A crank pin 433a projects from a front surface (end surface in the axial direction) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the base side displacement member 440 (shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440.

  Here, the relative displacement member 450 is formed with a decorative portion 454 on the front side thereof. The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8). The whole is formed into a tapered shape in front view that becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. In other words, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle have six large outer shapes, respectively. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle are respectively in front. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Accordingly, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side ( The base end displacement member 440 is inclined downwardly in a stepped manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410 as it goes toward the rotational distal end side of FIG. 7 and FIG.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decoration member 480 is prevented from contacting the decoration member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When both the displacement members 440 and 450 pass through the back side of the lens, the effect of the production is improved and the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15). ) To improve the force.

  The detailed configuration of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and includes a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462 in the longitudinal direction. And a rod groove 463 that is recessed on the back surface side as a recessed groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Thereby, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and with the rotation of the connecting rod 460, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide-displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are respectively disposed on the front surface (one surface) side of the case body 410. Compared with the case where the base body displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front surface (one surface) side, and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back surface (other surface) side, respectively, with the case body 410 interposed therebetween. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive motor 420 is positioned on the longitudinal extension line (see FIG. 13A), these drive motors. 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as the retracted position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with a plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. The connecting rod 460 constituting the mechanism is connected to the connecting rod 460 (the connection hole 462 and the rod groove 463), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433, and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450, as will be described later. Are disposed in a region between the rod support shaft 411 and the base support shaft 412 of the case body 410, the transmission means (the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411 and 412. Set the placement.

  Thereby, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission means is disposed in a region overlapping the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 described above, it is possible to synergistically reduce the size of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and the front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing the transmission means in the front view. FIG. 9A shows a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9B. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotational position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotational position.

  9 and 10 schematically illustrate the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

  In the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIGS. 13 to 15 are referred to as appropriate. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in a state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are respectively arranged at the reference positions (see FIGS. 12A and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end portion on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the extended position to the retracted position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crankpin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are the other. It is possible to avoid a collision with the member.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod The connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod After sliding toward the support shaft 412 (the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side), and the connecting rod 460 has the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). As a result, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  Even when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is located at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the retracted position to the extended position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to electrical factors, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a special mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body portion 411, and a main body portion 441. The first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) are mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and by this insertion, the base side displacement member 440 can rotate to the case body 410 around the base side support shaft 413 as a rotation center. Is pivotally supported. That is, as will be described later, the base side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). And is supported rotatably.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position below the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 411 and biased to one side (an overhang position side) from the center in the width direction of the main body portion 411. As a result, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can reduce the rotation angle required for the base side displacement member 440 so that the base side displacement member 440 protrudes from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (predetermined area). The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of the presentation due to the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 includes a main body portion 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 451 (the vertical direction in FIG. 11). A pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 disposed on the front surface of the main body portion 451 are mainly provided.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base-side displacement member 440, respectively. By the insertion, the relative displacement member 450 is inserted. Is arranged to be slidable along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base side displacement member 440. That is, as will be described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, 13 and 14) and an overhang position (see FIGS. 12C and 15). The base-side displacement member 440 is slidably displaceable between the two.

  In this case, the connection pin 452 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 at the distal end side protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as will be described later, by rotating the crank gear 433, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 (see FIG. 9), so that the base side relative to the base side support shaft 413 is the center of rotation. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be executed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are disposed at different positions (with a gap) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the location where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front and rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction of approaching and separating from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in FIG. 11) than the slide pin 453. Thereby, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base side displacement member 440 to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 from swinging in the front-rear direction (direction approaching and separating from the case body 410).

  That is, only the longitudinal direction base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is the front end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

  A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, the collar C is provided along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can be slid smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base-side displacement member 440, the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460. The opposing distances between the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the end surface on the tip side by a disk-like disk S with screws, so that the connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460, and the slide pin 453 is an end surface on the tip side. A long flat slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed by a screw to prevent the base side displacement member 440 from coming off.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. 12A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 9B and FIG. 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the intermediate rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position Pm). . FIG. 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the state where the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation is performed with the base side support shaft 413 of the base side displacement member 440 as the rotation center. The reference position where the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is the minimum is the retracted position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and the relative displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are relative to each other. The displacement member 450 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 12A together with the relative displacement member 450 with the proximal support shaft 413 as the rotation center (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm as shown in FIG. 12B (see FIGS. 9B and 14), the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 is changed to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at a rotational position that is the most distant from the position.

  In this case, the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, when the connecting rod 460 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are moved downward. Since the sliding direction is a direction substantially along the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base displacement member 440. Does not generate force component in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of slide displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is used. Only rotation can be generated.

  As a result, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state in which the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) and the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the projecting operation unit 400 and to increase the degree of design freedom when defining the shape of the decorative member 480.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12B, the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9B) causes the connecting rod 460 to turn counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). And the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 in a direction extending along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444). (Second operation). As a result, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 12C (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 becomes the base position. It is arranged at the overhang position where the overhang amount from the side displacement member 440 is the maximum.

  In this case, the rotational position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position that is the most distant from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12B about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center moves the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 is not generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center.

  Thereby, the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (the state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). Rotation to a position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the relative displacement member is in a state where the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (the base displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position). A slide displacement (second operation) for extending 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed. In other words, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed in two stages as separate operations, different operations can be performed in the game compared to the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. Can be clearly recognized, and the effect of rendering by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced.

  The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 to 15 are front views of the protruding operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) 9 (b) and FIG. 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). FIGS. 13B, 14B, and 15B show a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protruding operation unit 400, as described above, the base side displacement member 440 is moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A and FIGS. 14A and 15A. ) And a relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base-side displacement member 440 is formed between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). A first operation that is formed so as to be slidable between the overhanging position shown in FIG. 15A and rotates the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is base side displaced. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base side displacement member 440 in the retracted position is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is set in the second position. By slidably moving (extending) to the extended position by the operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base side displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. Therefore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the base side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, so that the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the decorative portion). The entire first portion 454a of 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. By disposing, the player can visually recognize substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking decoration portion 454) through the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 that has been retracted to the retracted position and cannot be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 86 is first caused to appear from the side to the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational motion (first operation). In addition, the player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and is then projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by a linear motion (second motion). An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion). It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the combined actions that are performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is projected and retracted with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retraction position and the overhang position are reciprocated).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member at the rotational position is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIGS. When the relative displacement member 450 is slid (displaced) to the reference position by the second operation, the outward protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, since both displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440 and 450 in the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 in a slidable state, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base side displacement member 450, for example, the second operation moves the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base side displacement member 450. Compared to the case of rotating, the space required to displace the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, and other parts and devices are arranged accordingly. Space can be secured. Further, since the displacement mode (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the displacement mode (rotation) of the base side displacement member 450 by the first operation, The effect of performing the first operation and the second operation continuously can be enhanced.

  Particularly, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the both displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member 440, and is slid and displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each of the displacement members 440, 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotation position, the displacement member 440 is enlarged as a whole by sliding displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be made sufficiently visible to the player, and the effects can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the state in which the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position, both the displacement members 440 are reduced by reducing the overall displacement by the sliding displacement (shortening) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be reduced, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

  Moreover, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (b), it is composed of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460, and together with the crank gear 433, a connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 constituting the crank mechanism. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 411 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the proximal displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performed. , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the component cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a structure in which a gear is provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460 and the teeth of the crank gear 433 are meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460 can be considered. Then, since the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in a plane and an overlap margin is not formed in a front view, a space necessary for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, which is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where the overlap margin is always present in a front view, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in the portion XVIIb in FIG. It is. 16 and 17 show a state where the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the projecting operation unit 400 is provided with a decorative member 480 on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member and is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize other members positioned on the back side of the decorative member 480 through the decorative member 480.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed so that a part thereof projects downward (lower side in FIG. 17B), and as shown in FIG. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed to have an overlap margin of dimension L. Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectories of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are It can overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state where the back side of the decoration member 480 is passed, an operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 is allowed to pass through so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by displacing both the displacement members 440 and 450. In particular, in the present embodiment, the front end side of the substrate displacement member 440 that is separated from the decoration member 480 protrudes from the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 that is close to the decoration member 480, so that it is difficult to contact the decoration member 480. As a result, the dimension L which is the overlap allowance can be made larger. Therefore, the production effect by the intersection can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, FIG. b) is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17B) from the lower side toward the distal end side (rotating distal end side of the base end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17B). The Further, the distal end side of the base side displacement member 440 arranged on the back side (left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is protruded from the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, in the whole base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450, it can be set as the shape arrange | positioned in the position deepened to the case body 410 side (back side, FIG.17 (b) left side) toward the front end side.

  Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus is overlapped with the decoration member 480 in front view. In addition, it is possible to suppress the contact between the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 480 while ensuring the improvement of the effect.

  In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the base-side support shaft 413 and the tip side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). ), During the first operation, the tip end side tends to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating from the case body 410 side, the vertical direction in FIG. 5), and the contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration according to the present embodiment (a shape that is inclined so that the distal end side is closer to the case body 410) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 close to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotational distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). The shape is located closer to the front side (front side) (right side in FIG. 17B) toward the base end side (upper rotation side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than the upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is inclined upward in a stepped manner in a direction away from the case body 410 (right side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the distal end side to the proximal end side.

  As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the extended position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved further forward (ie, forward) (that is, forward). It can be placed on the side close to the player) to increase the force. In particular, in this embodiment, since the outer shape is enlarged toward the portion (the second portion 454b than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side, The effect of enhancing the effect can be further exhibited.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). The

  Here, in the composite operation unit 500, a pair of left and right is disposed above the opening 301 with the rotary operation unit 600 interposed therebetween (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of composite operation units 500 are symmetrical. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the composite operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the driving motor 530 and also drives the driven member 560 in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing the relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement, as will be described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed around a predetermined position (shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different path from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and a change can be given to the displacement mode of the driven member 560. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the composite operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 22A is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22B is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 530 disposed on the back side of the back case body 520, and driving thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 transmitted through the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550 A driven member 560 that can be connected is mainly provided.

  The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are respectively provided in the internal spaces (between opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. Housed in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27A to 29A). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As will be described later, the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). .

  The back case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is disposed concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. In other words, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511 and 521 that respectively support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550 so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. I can support it. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b, and the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523, as will be described later. By (guidance), it is possible to define the posture of the interposition plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative slide position with respect to the driven member 550) (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when being rotated by the drive motor 530. A crankpin 541 is disposed at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 along with the rotation, and supports the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a shaft. By pivotally supporting the holes 511 and 521, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are rotatably held. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-like front plate portion 551 and a long plate-like intervention that intersects the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle in front view. A plate portion 552, a columnar shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552, and a circle protruding from the back surface of the interposed plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. A columnar shaft portion 554 is mainly provided.

  The front plate portion 551 is a member disposed on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an ellipse in front view on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A drive groove 551a is formed. The drive groove 551 a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, and as a result, the shaft portion 553, 554 is rotated as a center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end thereof (the front stomach body portion 551). A connecting groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is formed on the side opposite to the side to which the is connected. The connection groove 552 a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561 b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b so as to be rotatable and slidable. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has a region that overlaps with the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 554, and The connection shaft 561b is configured to be disposed within the region (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as will be described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553, 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552-554, The axial direction end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the back surface of the base plate side of the front plate portion 551 (the side opposite to the side where the driving groove 551a is drilled), They are assembled by fastening them together with screws.

  In this case, four pins 553a project from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. The pins 553a are assembled in a state of being received in the holes 551b. Thereby, the number of screws can be suppressed to reduce the component cost, and the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 can be reliably made non-rotatable.

  Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550, whereby the driven member is connected to the driving member 550. 560 is connected so that relative displacement (rotational and sliding displacement) is possible. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven in accordance with the displacement of the driving member 550, and the connecting shaft 561 b of the interposed plate portion 561 is connected to the connecting groove 552 a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. In addition, by being inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slidable state. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions with a decorative shape formed on the front surface, A back plate portion 563 that is connected to the back side of the interposed plate portion 561 and that is connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 is mainly configured.

  The interposed plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the front case body 510 is located in front of the interposed plate portion 561. The first pin 561a inserted through the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) protrudes, and the connection shaft 561b protrudes from the back surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (the interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, whereby the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the driven plate 561 (that is, the driven member 560) has a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a sliding direction. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided on the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the first pin of the rear case body 520. By inserting the two guide grooves 523, the same action as described above can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is provided in both the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposition plate portion 552). The displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the back case body 520 is regulated by being inserted into the connecting shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid relative to the driven member 550). ) And the role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and sliding displacement) by being inserted through the connection groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  The back plate portion 563 is a circular member in a front view disposed on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and a contact portion on the front surface (FIG. 25 (a), the front side surface of the paper). 563a is projected. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape in front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the back plate portion 563 (the protruding front end surface of the contact portion 562a) is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the back plate 563 with the concentric contact portion 563 on the connection shaft 561b, when the connection shaft 561b slides (guides) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. Even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b by the rotational action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body. It is possible to suppress a change in the support reaction force by keeping the contact state of the back surface of 520 constant. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposing plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 562 and 563, and the back plate portion. Assembling is performed by bringing the end face in the axial direction of the connecting shaft 561b of the interposition plate portion 561 into contact with the front face of 563 and fastening and fixing them together with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c protruding from the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b are received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563, respectively, so that they are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other is the above-described driven structure. Since it is the same as that of the member 550, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Returning to FIG. The combined operation unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thereby, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted in advance into the connection groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is mounted on the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the back case body 520, and the driven member 550 is connected to the crank pin 541 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. The drive groove 551a of the (front plate portion 551) is inserted. In addition, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the back plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. To do. Thus, the driven member 560 can be assembled to the back case body 520 in a rotatable state, and can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable state, and driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, the components can be assembled by sequentially assembling the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, so that the assembly cost can be reduced and the unit can be unitized. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the gaming machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. FIG. FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIG. 30A, FIG. 31A and FIG. 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position. This corresponds to the state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 corresponds to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). As a result, the driven member 550 tilts the front end side (formation portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (right side in FIG. 30 (b)) and the interposed plate. The front end side of the portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is a rotation end point in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centered on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 lifts the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is connected to the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (FIG. 30 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 positioned on the upper end side (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side ( The first pin 561a is disposed in a horizontal posture with the left side of the first pin 561a facing leftward (left side in FIG. 27A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in a counterclockwise (front-turning) direction when viewed from the front centered on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the drive shaft 531 is rotating by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is rotated to a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 causes the front plate portion 551 to be substantially upright, and to be interposed. The installation plate portion 552 is set to a substantially horizontal posture. That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is positioned so that the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 has the second The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (FIG. 31 (b) vertical direction), and the rightmost in the left / right direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). It is arranged at the position. Further, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). The inclined portion is disposed in an upper left direction (upper left side in FIG. 28A) in the front view. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front while the drive shaft 531 is rotating from the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank member 540 The crank pin 541 is slid along the driving groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has a front surface with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhanging position by being rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. ), The driven member 550 is tilted from the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the left side of the front view (left side in FIG. 32 (b)). It is set as the attitude | position which dropped the front end side (formation part of the connection groove | channel 552a) of the board part 552 to the downward direction (FIG.32 (b) lower side). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 drops the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 downward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed down to the lower side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the lowest position in the vertical direction (FIG. 32 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 32 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. Further, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 located on the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 is provided. The upright posture is such that (the portion where the first pin 561a is disposed) is directed upward (upper side in FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is moved along with the displacement of the driven member 550. The drive member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shafts 533 and 554, and even when the driven member 550 is displaced along a constant path, the path (displacement) is different from that of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 can be displaced in the above-described manner. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, The driven member 560 can be displaced by a different path (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the means for displacing the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 (displacement defining means) is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connection shaft 561b. In other words, the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are guided along the guide grooves 513 and 523, whereby the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed in accordance with the outline (shape) of each guide groove 513, 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by a mechanical element such as a guide groove and a shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure thereof is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since simple mechanical elements can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 is reduced. It is possible to increase the degree of design freedom when setting the mode. As a result, it is possible to easily ensure variations in the displacement modes that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable, a first guide groove 513 and a first pin 561a are used to mainly define the rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure that is configured by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly defines the slide displacement are provided. Thereby, not only the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased, but even when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement), each of these displacements is changed to the first. And it can guide appropriately by the 2nd guidance structure, respectively. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability as the movable member can be improved.

  Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the interposed plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. This is true even in a configuration where On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and therefore, they need not be formed in a relatively large outer shape. There is a tendency that a dead space is formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove portion 513 as the front case body 510, a space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be sufficiently secured by effectively using the dead space. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513, and accordingly, it is possible to increase variations of changes that can be imparted to the displacement mode. In addition, since it is the same as that of the case of the 1st guide structure also about the 2nd guide structure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the back case body 520, respectively. Therefore, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed. Can be formed without considering each other's formation position.

  That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extended length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotational operation unit 600 includes a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a first rotator 650 having an annular shape in front view is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and the back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in front view is concentrically disposed on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult to make the player recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is a form in which each rotating body is rotated independently without being associated with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of rendering by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let you.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since it is rotated in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and the effect of rendering can be achieved by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotational operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. 35 and 36, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is not shown. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a back case body 620 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the back case body 620, and driving thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630 and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 are transmitted via the plurality of gears. Of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 which are rotated by being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610. The light emitting device 680 disposed on the front is mainly provided.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are respectively formed with openings 611 and 621 that are circular in front view, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided projecting toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Supported as possible. In addition, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with respect to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 disposed on the case body 610 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft, and is attached to the back surface of the back case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 among the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Engage. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431. As a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are used. Can be rotated respectively.

  As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a gear group for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. The teeth are formed as spur gears that are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the first storage gear 641 is the top and the fifth storage is performed. One gear train (gear train) with the gear 645 as the tail is formed.

  The front gear 646 is pivotally supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be able to rotate synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotating shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and the gears 645, 646 and the rotating shaft are integrated. Turned and turned.

  According to the gear group configured as described above, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the front gear 646 is rotated by rotating the fifth housing gear 645.

  Here, as will be described later, the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (the storing flange portion 653) is provided in the second receiving gear 642, and the second outer periphery of the second rotating body 660 is provided in the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are engaged with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630, respectively. That is, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational drive of the one drive motor 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second storage gear 642 rotated synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645 be different, but also the rotation between the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646. You can also change the direction. As a result, as will be described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is provided on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is provided on the front side of the front case cheer 610. On the back side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and both the gears 642 and 646 are engaged with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Compared to the structure to be driven, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. It can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second housing gear 642 of the gear train is engaged are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is performed. The gear case and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 in an invisible manner can be simply formed using the back case body 610 without the need to provide another member.

  The first rotator 650 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrated with the main body 651 and one side in the axial direction of the main body 651. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed and a storage flange portion 653 that is fastened and fixed to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body 651 with a screw.

  The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) with the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, a detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), for easy understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically enlarged to be larger than actual and the first projecting portion 651a. A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed at each top of the second protrusion 651b, is illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the main body 651 is formed with a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651b, and at a position corresponding to the second protrusion 651b. An offset portion 651c is formed.

  The first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, and along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (FIG. 37 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). However, it is a part extended over the entire length of the main body part 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of places (a total of eight places in the present embodiment) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and the first projecting part 651a and the second projecting part. The portions 651b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a cylindrical body having a circular cross section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the main body 651 and the axial direction coincide with each other. Of the embedded columnar body, the main body portion 651 is formed by a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface (a part of the columnar body). The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b projecting from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 extend over the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The rigidity of 651 can be increased.

  The second projecting portion 651b is further extended along the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37 (b)). Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with a screw, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653. The main body 651 and the storage flange 653 can be firmly coupled so as not to be relatively rotatable by being fitted in the recessed portion (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the second protruding portion 651b formation portion in the main body portion 651 is offset to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protruding portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body portion 651 in the axial direction view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651 as described above, the axial center of the second projecting portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be positioned. Stiffness can be increased.

  The plurality of (four in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality of (four in this embodiment) second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 is set to be the same, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. The plurality of (eight in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the virtual circle IS inscribed by the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to a dimension equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, in a state where the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact areas thereof are defined as the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion. Since it can limit to each top part of 651b, a contact resistance can be suppressed and the main-body part 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical part 612.

  In particular, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b have an arc shape as viewed in the axial direction (specifically, an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut by a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is convex outward). ), The contact area can be suppressed, and the tops of the first and second projecting portions 651a and 651b are smoothly in contact with the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, the main body 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even when there is shakiness due to dimensional tolerance.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b project not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Thereby, when the main body 651 is molded by the resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 is made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first projecting portion 651a has a projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651 in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. The projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c and the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c are the same. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability can be further ensured.

  Further, the second protrusion 651b is provided with a circular hole having a circular cross section that is formed along the axial direction thereof (see FIG. 36). Thereby, the thickness of the second protrusion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protrusion 651a can be made uniform with other parts (the main body 651, the offset part 651c, the first protrusion 651a, etc.). As a result, the formability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is engraved on the inner peripheral surface of the hole drilled in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the second projecting portion 651b formed with a relatively large diameter serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, thereby ensuring the strength of the screw fastening portion. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is reinforced, so that the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is connected to the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying it, both can be firmly connected and durability can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. The front effect part 652 is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part, and is formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, and an appearance imitating a glossy metal is imparted to the front effect portion 652. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but is plated so that the player can visually recognize the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652. Can be avoided.

  The front view portion 652 is formed in a saw blade shape in which a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) having an indefinite shape are repeated along the circumferential direction. Mountains (valleys) are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction (unequal pitches). As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 pass through the front side (front side) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 in order, thereby emitting light to the player. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the cylindrical portion of the front case body 610 It is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the main body 651 inserted through 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by screwing the screw inserted through the storage flange portion 653 into the second projecting portion 651b of the main body portion 651 as described above.

  The storage flange portion 653 is set to have a thickness dimension that is equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension that corresponds to the front case body 610 and the back case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Accordingly, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back surface of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653. The first outer peripheral gear 653a has a second storage in the above-described gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. The gear 642 is meshed. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 is moved. It is rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first rotating body 650 includes a gear train disposed along the periphery of the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a projected surface portion 671 of a spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side thereof, so it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 is disposed. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, a position between the gear (first outer gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second housing gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a and the second housing gear 642 of the first rotating body 650 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and is a main body formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material. 661 and a front effect portion 662 formed integrally with the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

  The main body portion 661 is set to have an inner diameter dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610 and is fitted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (that is, The cylindrical case 612 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the main body 661) and is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer peripheral gear 661a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation. The body 660 is rotated.

  Thus, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. Difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the arrangement position of the second rotating body 660 is set to the front case body. 610 can be defined as a standard. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed in the front case body 610 is expressed as the front case body 610. Can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 661 has an axial dimension that is set to a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 causes the end face on one side in the axial direction or the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661 to abut on the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  The main body 661 has a front ridge 661b and a back ridge 661c projecting from the end surface on one side in the axial direction and the end surface on the other side in the axial direction. The front ridge 661b is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the back ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape in front view at a plurality of locations. Thereby, when rotating the 1st rotary body 660, the frictional resistance between the main-body part 661, the front case 610, and the 2nd rotary body 650 (front effect part 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front effect part 662 is located on the back side of the front effect part 652 in the first rotating body 650 and is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part together with the effect part 652, and is radial from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 661. It is formed to project outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and an annular shape in front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b which is a portion.

  The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, the entire surface (entire range) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 is plated. The inner peripheral portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as will be described later, a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. Thus, when the light-emitting element 681 is viewed intermittently and selectively by the player, the light-emitting element 681 is watermarked on the inner peripheral side portion 662b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front effect portion 662. Thus, it is possible to make the player visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light transmissive material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is housed. The video image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection surface portion 671 is visually recognized by the player. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the back case body 620, and the projected surface portion 671 causes approximately half of the spherical shell to protrude forward from the front surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. In this posture, it is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in front view that is fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board accommodated in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. A plurality of (twelve in the present embodiment) light emitting elements 682 disposed (mounted) on the side, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. It is disposed on the back side of 662.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the front view, the light emitting device 680 has the light emitting element 682 exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and transmits light emitted from the light emitting element 682 through the opening of the case body 681 (first rotation). It is possible to irradiate the front direction portions 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed on the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is rotated, it is possible to make the player visually recognize light emitted by the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for allowing a player to visually recognize light emitted from the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIGS. 38A and 38B show a state in which the first rotary bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. 39A is a cross-sectional view of the rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B is a rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. FIG.

  38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 and the rotating operation unit 600 Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. FIG. 38 schematically illustrates a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 illustrated in FIG. 38.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotator 650 is an irregularly shaped mountain (second portion) and valley (first portion) that are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the light emitting device 680, the light emitting element 682 is disposed at a radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652, and in the front effect portion 652. It is set at a radial position (FIG. 39 (a) vertical position) that is radially inward (downward in FIG. 39 (a)) from the summit.

  In this case, as described above, the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) and is formed so as to transmit light. The formation range of the peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 (that is, transmitted). The player can visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the device 680.

  In addition, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662a is disposed to face the back side of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is formed with alternately crests and valleys in the circumferential direction in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting element 682 emits light and the second rotating body 660. The player can make the player intermittently view through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 682. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as a center.

  Further, the outer peripheral side portion 662a in the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal, and the front (front side) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. Is provided with a front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in opposite directions, the first rotary body 650 has a valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotary body 650. The player can visually recognize the aspect in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two-rotor 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the player who views the first rotating body 650 from the front side intermittently visually recognizes the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front rendering unit 652. On the summit side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect portion 652, the front effect portion 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain valley shape) of the first rotating body 650. Can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them. As a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). It is possible to effectively perform the effects of rotating each of them.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed in 16 places in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are in the circumferential direction 12. Since the light emitting elements 682 are disposed at the twelve places, the player can selectively make only a specific light emitting element 682 visible.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect portion 652 is different from the circumferential spacing of the light emitting elements 682. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect unit 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38A, FIG. ), Different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 arranged at the four locations in the upper right, lower right, lower left and upper left are made visible.

  Thereby, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the visually recognized light emitting element 682 can be changed in the circumferential direction, so that a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and The effect of rotating the second rotating body 660) can be more effectively performed.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after the housing flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the back case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is attached to the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. The second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 through the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 is obtained. Displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) can be regulated.

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is pivotally supported by the front case body 610 by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotator 660 (the front ridge 661b and the back ridge 662c) is brought into contact with the back of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 and the front of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Thereby, the displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) of the 2nd rotary body 660 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 can be controlled.

  Thus, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state, and the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself. Since this also serves as a part that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified correspondingly. In addition, the holding flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 with a holding structure that can hold the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Since it can form only by doing, an assembly process can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620. Therefore, the front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are rotated a plurality of times. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is mounted from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastened and fixed. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted in a separate process with respect to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotary bodies 650 and 660. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base side displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably arranged with respect to 440. That is, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the first operation is to rotate the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotation position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation is A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Even with this configuration, the base side displacement member 450 in the retracted position is disposed at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is disposed at the extended position by the second operation. While both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player and the effect of the performance can be sufficiently exhibited, the relative displacement member 450 in the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. Since the base side displacement member 440 in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, both the displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required to accommodate the displacement member is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is more than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case of projecting to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is the base displacement member 450. You may employ | adopt the structure protruded to the decoration member 480 side (FIG.17 (b) upper side) rather than the front end side.

  Also with this configuration, the rotational trajectories of both displacement members 440 and 450 can intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The production effect by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. Improvements can be made.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connection shaft 561b) can be rotated by forming the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 in a long hole shape. In addition, the case of being connected in a slidable state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a driven member for the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) is formed by forming the connection groove 552a in a circular shape. A configuration in which the slide displacement of 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be employed. Even in this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. It is possible to enhance the production effect by adding a change to.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is engaged with the gear disposed on the driven member 560 concentrically with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. You may comprise by the curved rack gear formed along the circular arc centering on the drive shaft 551a of the to-be-driven member 550, and arrange | positioned at the front case body 510 or the back case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are inserted through the both guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1 pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are connected to the driven member. 560 and a configuration in which a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided in the front case body 510 and / or the back case body 520 is employed. May be. This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear motion and rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The production effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is drilled (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first guide groove 513 is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it may be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 has only a shape that can guide the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended, while the connection groove 551a is linearly extended. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are linearly extended while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, for the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to a constant arc shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arc shapes of a plurality of curvature radii are combined. It is naturally possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S shape). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed in a more complicated manner, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is defined as the rotation start end of the rotation direction of the driven member 550 about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Or in the state arrange | positioned in the terminal end and its vicinity, it is preferable to make a radius larger than a reference value (a curvature is made small). That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the first range in the vicinity and the first range or the end in the vicinity thereof and the second range in the vicinity thereof is made larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second range. It is preferable to make it larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is set. Until the entirety of the driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible) from the beginning of being exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, it is possible to reduce the load of the drive motor 530 without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, Since the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded, the effect that the driven member 560 appears suddenly from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 is the front case body 510. It is possible to perform an effect that hides quickly on the back of the camera.

  Alternatively, the driven member 560 is decorated within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined up and down by 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b in a horizontal posture (viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)). While the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where the weight of the driven member 560 (gravity action) needs to be supported by the driving force of the driving motor 530 is relatively large, the radius is increased, and the n-type friction resistance and the driven in each guide groove 513,514. An area where the influence of the inertia force due to the posture change of the member 560 can be reduced and the load of the drive motor 530 can be reduced, while the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity) needs to be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530 is relatively small Then, by reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the effect.

  In the rotational operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 are integrated in the first rotating body 650 and the storage flange portion 653 is separate is described. Instead, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 may be integrated, and the front effect portion 652 may be a separate body so that the first rotating body 650 is formed. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding a plurality of rotating bodies can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering unit 662 of the second rotator 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described. Instead, a part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. Examples of other shapes include a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a corrugated cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface combining these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only can the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662b be irregularly reflected or refracted, the diffused reflection or Since the movement in the direction of refraction can be given, the effect of the production can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the outer diameter size of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotator 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view ( However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 when viewed from the front. Thereby, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect part 662, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. Note that if the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotator 660 relative to the first rotator 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 is omitted, but it may be configured as follows. That is, the mountain shape of at least one or both of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed to a size that can shield the front gear 646 when viewed from the front. You may make it stop rotation of the 1st rotary body 650 or the 2nd rotary body 660 in the phase position where a shape part is arrange | positioned in front of the front gear 646. FIG. Thereby, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.
<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding operation unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A base-side displacement member that is disposed on the base-side displacement member and is formed so as to be displaceable between a reference position and an overhanging position protruding outward from the base-side displacement member with respect to the reference position A displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position, and the relative displacement member with respect to the proximal displacement member at the reference position and the extended position. A game machine A1 that is capable of executing a second action that is displaced between each other.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side rotatably supported (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, see paragraphs 0175-0189, FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the distal end side of the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position which is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in a direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted out of the display area (retreat position) of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it is difficult to make the displacement member fully visible to the player at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect of presentation is sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, if the outer shape of the displacement member is large, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The gaming machine A1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and allows the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is disposed on the base side displacement member that is formed to be rotatable between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the reference position and the reference position are disposed on the base side displacement member. A relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the projecting positions projecting outward from the base side displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; Since the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position can be executed, the base displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing at the position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the projecting position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be projected outward from the base side displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole, the displacement member can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player at the rotational position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  On the other hand, when the base side displacement member at the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the extended position is arranged at the reference position by the second operation, whereby the base of the relative displacement member is arranged. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  The second operation may be performed at least until the second operation is arranged at the retracted position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed in front of a moving plane of the displacement member and that has an opening, and the relative displacement when the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation. When at least a part of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member A gaming machine A2 characterized in that an area visible to the player through the opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and the relative displacement is achieved. Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then performing an effect of enlarging the region in which the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member by a linear motion (second motion). Can do.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed by moving the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member with the reference position and the overhang. A gaming machine A3 that is slid and displaced between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed with respect to the base side displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the overhang position, for example, the relative movement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with a case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base displacement member. A space necessary for displacing to the extended position can be suppressed, and accordingly, a space for disposing other parts and devices can be secured. In addition, since the displacement mode of the relative displacement member by the second motion can be made different from the displacement mode of the base displacement member by the first motion, the effect of performing the first motion and the second motion Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is mutually mutual. Since it is set as the direction along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by the slide displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotation position, the displacement member is enlarged as a whole by extension, so that the player can be made fully visible, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, at the retracted position, the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole by shortening, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position first appears from the side of the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member Only the player can visually recognize only, and then the linear movement (second operation) is extended toward the opening of the front member to enlarge the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the visual recognition area is expanded by the unexpectedness due to the change of the motion form and the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed by being played and a sense of unity of the combined action by being performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member simply protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the front member only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  The gaming machine A4 includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is in front view with the displacement member disposed at the retracted position. Since it is disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means.

  The gaming machine A5 includes a holding member that holds the driving unit, the transmission unit, and the displacement member, and the driving unit and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member has a longitudinal direction thereof. A gaming machine A6, wherein the driving means is disposed in the retracted position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension line of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member. For example, the driving device is driven on one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member. Compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively disposed, the size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive unit is positioned on the extension line in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive unit can be disposed linearly. Therefore, the space required as the retreat position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes: a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member; and a holding member that holds the transmission unit. The transmission member drives the driving unit. A rotating member that is rotated by receiving a force, and a predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. A link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member, and when the rotation member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, As the link member is displaced, the base side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member, whereby the first operation is performed, and the rotation member is moved between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. If the rotation is Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one-side position is pivoted to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is changed to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. Can communicate. In this case, when the rotation member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base side displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation Can be executed. That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so that the component cost can be reduced. This can reduce the product cost accordingly.

  In addition, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided at one side position of the link member, and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotation member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. Space required for arrangement of members and link members increases. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, since the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotating member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in front view. A gaming machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decorative member are arranged in front view. It can be crossed in part, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is configured such that one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is a rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement member is in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base side displacement member. The second operation is configured such that the relative displacement member is slid between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the base displacement member, and the decorative member is The displacement movement at the rotation tip side of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in the front view, and the first operation causes the base displacement member to rotate. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotational position, the overlap with the displacement member in front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member has the rotation center side on the front side rather than the rotation tip side. Gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is shaped to be located behind the back side, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed when the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation. In this case, since the displacement member has one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member as the rotation center in the first operation, the rotation tip side that is the free end is likely to swing back and forth during the first operation, and is in contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the reference position to the overhang position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member is located on the front side of the rotation center side of the rotation tip side. By adopting the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be disposed more forward (side closer to the player) and the force can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is an arbitrary shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed gradually in a straight line or curved line.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other side of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove that receives and allows the relative displacement member to slide relative to the proximal displacement member, and the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is relative to the pin member relative to the pin member. A gaming machine A10 that is on the distal side in the sliding direction of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the front end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member rather than the pin member. Therefore, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the distal end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved away from the location where the proximal displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from shaking in the front-rear direction.
<About the concept of the invention taking the complex operation unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner. A driven member connected to the driven member in a displaceable manner; and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means allows the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. By being defined, the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display from the projecting position and the projecting position of the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the driving force from the driving means. There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position retracted in a direction outside the display area of the apparatus (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-200990 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to FIG. 15)). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent. However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement. The gaming machine B1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can change the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. To do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, so that the displacement of the driven member is determined. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a linear or arc-shaped fixed track, for example, the driven member can be displaced along a track different from the driven member. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced along the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the first groove. And a first guided portion formed on the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (first groove part) and the part guided by the part (first guided part), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state, when the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member, The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong change in impression as a change in the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state, so that the driven member is relatively moved along with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by slide displacement. The variation of change that can be given can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the second groove portion. And a second guided portion formed on the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the second groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidable, the guide structure is a combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion. By providing both with the guide structure, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement be increased, but even when the displaceable direction of the driven member relative to the driven member is multidirectional, the displacement can be reduced to two. Since it can guide with a guide structure, it can control that displacement becomes unstable and can aim at improvement in reliability as a movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (second groove part) and the part guided by the part (second guided part). As a result, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slide-displaced. A groove-like connection groove portion that is inserted in a possible state, and the second guided portion is inserted into the connection groove portion so that the driven member is rotatable and slidable in the driven member. A gaming machine B6 that is connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. Since the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the connecting groove portion, the driven member is held by being guided by the second groove portion to the second guided portion. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted through the connection groove portion can be combined. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least a portion where the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. The gaming machine B7 is provided with a contact portion that is in contact with a peripheral edge of the second guide portion, and the contact portion is formed in a concentric circular shape with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is in contact with the peripheral edge of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the contact portion is a second guided portion. The contact area between the contact part and the holding part (periphery of the second groove part) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove part). It is possible to suppress the support reaction force from changing. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The game machine B8 is formed so as to be capable of holding the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member can be reduced. Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state in which the driven member is displaceable, so that one device in which the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member. As a unit. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the gaming machine by assembling the unit to the gaming machine main body.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove portion is formed. It is easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove portion is made by using the dead space of the holding member that must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member into a unit. It can be secured. Thereby, the outline (shape) of a 1st groove part and the freedom degree of extension length can be increased, and the variation of the change which can be provided to the aspect of a displacement can be increased correspondingly.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove portion. The holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion that face each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion or the second facing portion. And the second groove portion is formed on the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the other Since the second groove portion is formed, the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be formed without considering the formation position of the counterpart. That is, when both the first groove portion and the second groove portion are formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both the first groove portion and the second groove portion, its contour (shape) and extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the opponent, The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B11 is characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a starting end or a terminal end larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state, the load is reduced and the driving is smoothly performed. Can be started.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a shielding member that shields the driven member invisible, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a portion of the driven member outside the area of the shielding member. The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that a radius in a corresponding region is made smaller than a reference value during a period from when the entire driven member is exposed outside the region of the shielding member until the driven member starts to be exposed.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member is shielded. An effect in which the member suddenly appears and an effect in which the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.
<Concept of Invention with Rotation Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member; a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotatably disposed on the holding member; and a driving unit that applies a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In the gaming machine, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape, and is fitted on the first rotating body concentrically.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that produces an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (see, for example, paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged apart from each other on the left and right are rotated in synchronization in the same direction to give a sense of unity to the effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations associated with each other, and by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and makes it easy for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies by associating the rotations of the rotating bodies with each other. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can fully exhibit the effect of.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is externally fitted concentrically with the first rotating body, so that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. Can be rotated concentrically. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and as a result, the effect of rendering by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can do.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body surrounding the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion that is inserted through the holding member, a one-side flange portion that projects outwardly in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body portion, and one of them. A second flange that projects outwardly on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange, and is opposed to the first flange with the holding member interposed therebetween. A gaming machine C3, which is externally fitted to a main body portion of the first rotating body and is disposed between a one-side flange portion of the first rotating body and a holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on the main body portion inserted through the holding member and on one side and the other side of the main body portion in the axial direction. A second flange that is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotor, and the one flange and the holding member of the first rotor. Therefore, the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body portion of the first rotating body is inserted through the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body performs the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the body and the second rotating body contacting the holding member.

  Furthermore, since the 2nd rotary body is externally fitted by the main-body part of a 1st rotary body, a 2nd rotary body can be rotatably hold | maintained to a holding member via the main-body part of a 1st rotary body. Further, the second rotating body is brought into contact with one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, whereby one axial direction of the second rotating body is made. The displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

  The gaming machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the first rotation A gaming machine C4, wherein the body and the second rotating body are respectively provided with gears meshed with the first gear and the second gear on the outer peripheral surface.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first and second rotating bodies are provided with gears that are meshed with the first gear and the second gear, respectively, on the outer peripheral surface. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and a production member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body portion, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. And the structure engaged with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is disposed on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. Is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. The first gear is meshed with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. For example, the first gear and the second gear are compared with the case where the first gear and the second gear are respectively meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear can be simplified.

  Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear is engaged are arranged with the one side flange portion and main body portion of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. By being arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the player can view the one side of the holding member from the front side with the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure that shields the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body from being invisible can be simplified using the holding member.

  In either the gaming machine C4 or C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear. And a gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, even if the two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation) The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be varied. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes toward the one side, and the first member is provided on an inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein the main body portion of the rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member Since the main body portion of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the portion and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, the second rotating body is disposed on the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, since the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with reference to the holding members, gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears carved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the first gear, and the second gear. As a result, it is possible to suppress uneven wear of the gears and suppress drive resistance.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body includes a plurality of protruding portions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extend in the axial direction of the main body portion, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the main body portion of the first rotating body protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion, and has a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since the plurality of projecting portions that are scattered apart are provided, the contact region between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portion, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  In addition, it is preferable that a protrusion part is curved by the circular arc shape from which the shape of the cross section cut | disconnected by the plane orthogonal to the axial direction of a main-body part becomes convex outward. The contact area between the inner surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body projects from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion. A gaming machine C9, comprising a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at the same phase as the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion, and the axial direction of the main body portion And a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at a position that is in phase with the protrusions (that is, on the back side of the region where the protrusions are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side to ensure the moldability. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protruding portions. A gaming machine C10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has the main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are protruding portions. In other words, since the projecting portion also serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position that overlaps at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body when viewed from the front, and is configured to emit light. A gaming machine C11 comprising a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in a front view. Since the light emitting means is provided, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, the light emitted by the light emitting means is played on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Can be visually recognized. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at positions overlapping with light emission by the light emitting means, and as a result, an effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies more effectively. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first portion in which the light emitting means is formed in a region where a rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view and the first portion. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the second portions where the light emitting means are formed invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the light emitting means visible in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view. Since the first part to be formed and the second part in which the light emitting means cannot be visually recognized are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. As the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the player can intermittently visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, it is possible to perform an effect of associating intermittent light emission of the light emitting means with the rotation, and as a result, an effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. Can be performed more effectively.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
60 Base plate (front member)
86 Center frame (front member)
410 Case body (holding member)
420 Drive motor (drive means)
431 Pinion gear (part of transmission means)
432 Intermediate gear (part of transmission means)
433 Crank gear (part of transmission means, rotating member)
440 Base displacement member (part of displacement member)
444 Second slide hole (slide groove)
450 Relative displacement member (part of displacement member)
453 Slide pin (pin member)
460 Connecting rod (part of transmission means, link member)
480 Decoration member 510 Front case body (part of holding member, shielding member)
513 1st guide groove (1st groove part, a part of displacement regulation means)
523 Second guide groove (second groove, part of displacement regulating means)
520 Rear case body (part of holding member, shielding member)
530 Drive motor (drive means)
550 Driven member 552a Connection groove (connection groove, part of displacement regulating means)
560 Follower (displacement member)
561a First pin (first guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
561b Connection shaft (second guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
563a Contact surface (contact portion)
610 Front case body (part of holding member)
612 Cylindrical part 620 Rear case body (part of holding member)
630 Drive motor (drive means)
631 Pinion gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
641 1st storage gear (a part of 1st transmission means, a part of 2nd transmission means)
642 Second storage gear (first gear)
643 Third storage gear (part of second transmission means)
644 Fourth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
645 fifth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
646 Front gear (second gear)
650 First Rotating Body 651 Main Body 651a First Projection (Part of Projection, Inner Projection)
651b Second protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
652 Front effect part (one side flange part, first part and second part)
653 Storage flange (flange on the other side)
653a First outer peripheral gear (gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body)
660 Second rotating body 661a Second outer peripheral gear (gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body)
670 Spherical liquid crystal device (production member)
682 Light emitting element (light emitting means)

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, the liquid crystal display device displays from the overhanging position that is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device and the overhanging position by the driving force from the driving means There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position that is retreated in a direction that is outside the region (Patent Document 1). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2011-200790 (see, for example, paragraph 0095, FIGS. 11 to 15)

However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.

  The present invention has been made to solve the above-described problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. .

In order to achieve this object, a gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and the driven member. Holding means for holding displaceably, a driven member connected to the driven member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement defining means for regulating the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding means , wherein by displacement with respect to the holding means of the driven member it is defined by the displacement regulating means, wherein the driving force of said driving means when the driven member is displaced, the driven member relative to the driven member Relatively displaced , the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on the first member, a first guided portion guided along the first groove by displacement of the driven member, and a second Formed in a groove on the member And a second guided portion guided along the second groove portion by displacement of the driven member, and the holding means includes the first member and the second member. Prepare .

According to claim 1 the gaming machine according while the output of the drive motion means constant, it can give a change in mode of displacement of the driven member.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front view of a unit storage member. It is a front perspective view of the protrusion operation | movement unit in the state which has arrange | positioned the base side displacement member and the relative displacement member in the retracted position. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a protruding operation unit, and (b) is a rear perspective view of a connecting rod. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is the front schematic diagram which illustrated the transmission means in front view typically. It is an exploded back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a back perspective view of a base side displacement member and a relative displacement member. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front view of a protrusion operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a protrusion operation unit. (A) is a side view of the projecting operation unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and (b) is a partially enlarged side view of the projecting operation unit in the portion XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a). It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a compound operation unit. (A) is a front view of a driven member and a driven member, (b) is a side view of the driven member and the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIIb in FIG. 22 (a). (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG. (A) is a front view of a driven member, (b) is a back surface part of a driven member. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member as viewed in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. (A) is a front schematic diagram of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the first guide groove, and (b) is a schematic front view of the driven member and driven member showing the relationship with the second guide groove. FIG. It is a front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a rotation operation unit. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a rotation operation unit. (A) is a rear view of a main-body part, (b) is a partial enlarged rear view of the main-body part which expands and shows the XXXVII part of Fig.37 (a). It is a front view of a rotation operation unit. 38A is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 38B is a cross-sectional view of the rotational operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. .

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 39, as a first embodiment, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shape that is substantially the same as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front front side.

  A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning holes 63, 64, and the like is detachably mounted on the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball ball game is played when a ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 has a ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

  On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower dish unit 15 that covers the lower side of the front frame 14 are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower dish unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to two upper and lower portions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower pan unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

  The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and a window part 14c that is formed in an approximately elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central part thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be seen on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

  On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 that stores balls is formed in a substantially box shape that protrudes forward and the upper surface is opened, and prize balls and rental balls are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the sphere thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the contents of the effect of super reach. The

  The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around it (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect of the game during the game by changing or controlling the light emission mode by turning on or blinking according to the change of the gaming state at the time of big hit or predetermined reach. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, there are provided electric decoration portions 29 to 33 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs. In the pachinko machine 10, these lighting parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and the lighting parts 29 to 33 are turned on by lighting or blinking of the built-in LEDs at the time of jackpot or reach effects. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is being hit or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has built-in light emitting means such as LEDs and can display the payout of a prize ball and when an error occurs.

  In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, on the lower side of the right illumination part 32, and a sticking space K1 on the front side of the game board 13 (FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin that is chrome-plated is attached to an area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to bring out more gorgeousness.

  A ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed below the window 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated in a state where a bill or a card is inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, Loans are made. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining amount as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as there is a remaining amount on the card or the like. Is done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. In addition, in a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 It is also possible to add a decorative seal or the like to the installation portion of the parts so that the component configuration is common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

  In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing a ball that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape having an open upper surface. Yes. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 that is operated by a player to drive a ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed.

  Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of movement (rotation position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. The resistance value of the variable resistor A ball is fired with a strength corresponding to (shooting strength), and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

  In the lower part of the front of the lower plate 50, a ball removal lever 52 is provided for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward. The ball removal lever 52 is always urged in the right direction. By sliding the ball release lever 52 in the left direction against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as “a thousand box”) for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. As described above, the operation handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower plate 50.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails (not shown) for ball guidance, windmills, rails 61 and 62, and general prizes. The opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the back surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). Attached to the side. The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. The general winning port 63, the first winning port 64, the second winning port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is fixed from the front side with a tapping screw or the like.

  The front center portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below mainly with reference to FIG.

  An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and the strip-shaped metal plate is located on the inner side of the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by the above is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and rear. A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is an area formed on the front surface of the game board 13 and defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening is provided and fired). Area where the falling sphere flows).

  The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball preventing member 68 is attached to the front end portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper portion of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. Is done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the sphere. Is bounced back to the center while being attenuated.

  First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs and a 7-segment display as light emitting means are disposed in the lower left portion of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left portion in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37 </ b> A and 37 </ b> B are configured to be selectively used depending on whether the ball has won the first prize opening 64 or the second prize opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37A operates. The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

  In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate, by means of LEDs, whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the process of changing the probability, in the short time, or in the normal state by a lighting state, or whether the pachinko machine 10 is changing or not by a lighting state. , Indicating whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, or a symbol that is out of place by a lighting state, indicating the number of held balls by a lighting state, and a 7-segment display device, Displays numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured to have different emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to winning of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and also determines the type of the big hit if it is determined to be a big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the lottery result is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but if it is a jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed. .

  Here, “15R probability variation jackpot” is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds. “4R probability variation jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of four. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after the maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and hits a short time during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

  In addition, the “high probability state” means a state in which the jackpot probability thereafter increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, that is, when the probability change is in progress (probability change), in other words, a game that easily shifts to the special game state. It is a state of. The high probability state (during probability change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The “low probability state” refers to a time when the probability of jackpot change is not occurring, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the jackpot probability is lower than that at the time of probability change. The short time state (short time medium) of the “low probability state” means that the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second prize opening 640 is obtained. It means the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state is a game state (a state where neither the big hit probability nor the second symbol hit probability is increased) which is neither probabilistic nor short in time.

  During probability change and time reduction, not only does the probability of winning the second symbol increase, but also the time for opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640 is changed, and the time is longer than normal. Is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the opened state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared to the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). Easy state. Therefore, during the probability change or the short time, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of jackpot lotteries can be increased.

  In addition, during the probability change or during the short time, it is not necessary to change the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second prize opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, It is good also as what changes the frequency | count that the accessory 640a opens more than usual. In addition, the probability of winning the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or in the short time, and the electric accessory 640a is released at the time when the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and once. It is good also as what changes at least one of the frequency | counts. In addition, during the probability change or in the short time, the time of opening the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per time is not counted, and the second symbol hit Only the probability may be changed so as to increase compared to the normal rate.

  The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In addition, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is synchronized with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B by using a winning (start winning) at the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as “display device”) that performs variable display, and an LED that displays the second symbol in a variable manner with the passage of a sphere of the through gate 67 as a trigger. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided.

  The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a center frame 86 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86. Further, when a projecting operation unit 400 or a composite operation unit 500, which will be described later, is operated, at least a part of the relative displacement member 450 and the driven member 560 protrudes into the opening of the center frame 86 and can be visually recognized through the opening. It is said. For example, when the projecting operation unit 400 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation (see FIG. 14A), the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86, When arranged in the extended position by the second operation (see FIG. 15B), substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 is visible through the opening of the center frame 86.

  The third symbol display device 81 is constituted by a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4). One symbol row is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol). These third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol column, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is like that. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). The decorative display according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel.

  Each time the ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “◯” and the symbol “X” as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time. A variable display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning symbol is a winning symbol, the symbol “◯” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the second symbol is displayed. Further, if the winning lottery results, the symbol of “x” is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation of the third symbol is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol (in this embodiment, a symbol “◯”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is displayed for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an activated state (opened) only.

  The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or during the shorter time than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and during the time reduction, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, the winning lottery can be performed more than during normal. Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning component 640a of the second winning opening 640 to be in an open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time.

  It is to be noted that the probability of winning is increased during probability change or time reduction, and other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening of the electric accessory 640a per hit are also used to reach the second prize opening 640 during probability change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for displaying the variation of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during probability change or short time, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, The opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

  The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the lower area of the variable display device unit 80, and a part of the ball flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through the balls launched to the game board. It is configured. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery of the second symbol is performed. After winning the lottery, the 2nd symbol display device displays a variation, and if the winning lottery results, the symbol “○” is displayed as the variable display stop symbol, and the winning lottery result may be off For example, the symbol “x” is displayed as the stop symbol of the variable display.

  The total number of passes through the through-gate 67 of the sphere is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and at the second symbol hold lamp (not shown). Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

  Note that the variable display of the second symbol is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol. A part of the symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of balls held for passing through the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Further, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be the left side of the variable display device unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol hold lamp may not perform lighting display.

  Below the variable display unit 80, a first winning port 64 through which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball wins the first winning port 64, a first winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the first winning port switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is made (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

  On the other hand, a second winning port 640 through which a ball can win is disposed on the right side of the first winning port 64 in front view. When a ball wins the second prize opening 640, a second prize opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused by the second prize opening switch being turned on. A jackpot lottery is performed (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

  Each of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 is also one of winning ports from which five balls are paid out as winning balls when a ball is won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize slot 640 are configured to be the same. The number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the first prize opening 64 is different from the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins to the second prize opening 640, for example, the ball to the first prize opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball wins the second prize opening 640 may be five.

  The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable. Normally, the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol “◯” is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in an open state (enlarged) State), and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than that during normal change during the probability change and the short time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. "Is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 640a is opened (enlarged) is increased. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a also becomes longer than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the short time compared to the normal time.

  Here, the probability of winning a big hit is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins the first winning port 64 and when the ball wins the second winning port 640. However, the probability that a 15R probability variation jackpot is selected as the jackpot type selected when the jackpot is won is higher when the ball wins the second winning slot 640 than when the ball wins the first winning slot 64. Is set. On the other hand, the first winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning port 640, and is in a state where the ball can always win.

  Therefore, during normal times, the electric winnings associated with the second winning opening 640 are often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called “left-handed”), and a lot of opportunities for lottery wins are obtained by winning at the first winning opening 64, resulting in a big hit It is advantageous for the player to aim for this.

  On the other hand, during the probability change and the shortage of time, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is likely to be in an open state, and it is easy to win the second winning opening 640. Therefore, the ball is fired toward the second prize opening 640 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called “right-handed”), and is passed through the through gate 67 to open the electric accessory. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment launches a ball to the player in accordance with the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is probable, short, or normal). Can be changed between “left-handed” and “right-handed”. Thus, the player can be changed in the way the ball is hit, so that the game can be enjoyed.

  A variable winning device 65 is disposed on the upper right side of the first winning port 64, and a horizontally-long rectangular specific winning port (large opening) 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning at the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has passed, The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. In this special gaming state, the special winning opening 65a that is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or ten balls have been won).

  The specific winning opening 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which the opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is given out a larger amount of prize balls than usual in order to give a gaming value (game value). Is done.

  Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate covering the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for driving to open / close forward with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. And. The special winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or is difficult to win. In the case of a big hit, the large opening opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to win the specific winning opening 65a. It operates to repeat the state and the state alternately.

  Note that the special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. When the game area is provided with a large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and the LED corresponding to the jackpot is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning port 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when the ball wins into the specific winning port 65a while the specific winning port 65a is opened. You may make it form as a state. Further, the number of the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is not limited to the upper right side of the first winning opening 64. The variable display device unit 80 may be on the left side.

  A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate paper, an identification label or the like is provided at the lower right corner of the game board 13, and the certificate paper or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. 35 (see FIG. 1).

  The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. Balls that flow down the game area and have not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out port 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64.

  A number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (acts) such as a windmill are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control apparatus 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control apparatus 111), a firing control board (launching control apparatus 112), a power supply board (power supply apparatus 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

  The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 and a dispensing unit 93 that form a protective cover. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as necessary.

  The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other, and each control device and each board are accommodated.

  Further, the substrate box 100 (main control device 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and launch control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover so that they cannot be opened by a sealing unit (not shown) (caulking structure). Consolidated). In addition, a seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover so as to cover the box base and the box cover. This seal seal is made of a brittle material. If the seal is to be peeled off in order to open the substrate boxes 100, 102, or if the substrate boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are removed. Cut to the side. Therefore, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal.

  The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 that is located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opens upward, a tank rail 131 that is connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and is gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 that is vertically connected to the side, and a payout device 133 that is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and that pays out a ball by a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

  The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated, for example, to eliminate ball clogging (return to a normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as ball clogging in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device are performed by the MPU 201. Execute.

  Various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 to operate. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller only in one direction.

  The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and a return address of a control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. And a work area (work area) in which values are stored. Note that the RAM 203 is configured so that the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 and the data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer and the value of each register when the power is shut off (including when the power failure occurs, the same applies hereinafter) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of power-on (including power-on due to power failure cancellation, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before power-off based on information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. Is input immediately, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 has a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol holding lamp, and a lower side of the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 made up of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the MPU 201 via the input / output port 205. Send.

  The input / output port 205 includes a switch group (not shown), various switches 208 including a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 described later provided in the power supply device 115. Are connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to perform payout control of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 212 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211, the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. And a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the power failure signal SG1 is also input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the firing control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball that has been paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but is not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball according to the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 is obtained when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch a ball. . The ball launching unit 112a includes a launching solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and a ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio in an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination units 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuating effects (variation). The display mode setting of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and a notice effect, is controlled. The MPU 221 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 222 that stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 including an address bus and a data bus. Main controller 110, display controller 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other device 228, frame button 22 and the like are connected to input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 420, 530, and 630.

  The sound lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the player operates the frame button 22, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, or the super reach is performed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the production contents at the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 so that the rear image corresponding to the changed stage is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to the command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113.

  Further, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display command received from the display control device 114, The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on a command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81 can produce a variation effect of the third symbol. The display is controlled. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

  The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM deletion switch 122 (see FIG. 3). And an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies a necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in the voltage of AC 24 volts supplied from the outside, and drives various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and the 12 volt voltage, the 5 volt voltage, and the backup voltage are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 as necessary voltages.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power interruption, power interruption) occurs when this voltage falls below 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. Based on the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. Note that the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is a drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing even after the DC stable voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is maintained at a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. Transmit to device 111.

  Next, the unit storage member 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. 5 and 6 are front views of the unit housing member 300. In FIG. 5, the operation units 400 to 800 are arranged at the retracted position, and in FIG. 6, the protruding operation unit 400 and the combined operation unit 500 are stretched. The state of being arranged in the extended position is illustrated respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the unit storage member 300 includes a rectangular bottom wall plate in front view and an outer wall plate erected from the outer edges of the four sides of the bottom wall portion (front side in FIG. 5). The unit storage member 300 is formed in a box shape that is open on the side. The bottom plate of the unit storage member 300 is formed with an opening 301 having a rectangular shape in front view at the center thereof, whereby the unit storage member 300 is formed in a frame shape having a rectangular shape in front view. The opening 301 is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (that is, the third symbol display device 81 can be disposed).

  The unit accommodating member 300 accommodates the projecting operation unit 400, the composite operation unit 500, the rotation operation unit 600, the retracting operation unit 700, and the overhang operation unit 800 in the internal space, whereby one operation unit 200 is stored. Configured as

  The protruding operation unit 400 includes a base side displacement member 440 and a relative displacement member 450, and these displacement members 440 and 450 are operated (displaced) between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Let In the retracted position shown in FIG. 5, the space required for the retracted position is suppressed by forming a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are overlapped in the front-rear direction (the vertical direction in FIG. 5). On the other hand, at the overhang position shown in FIG. 6, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base side displacement member 440 to increase the overall size, thereby ensuring visibility and enhancing the effect. The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The combined operation unit 500 includes a driven member 550 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) and a driven member 560, and these members 550 and 560 are disposed between the retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and the extended position shown in FIG. Operate (displace) with. In this case, the combined operation unit 500 causes the driven member 550 to perform only a rotational motion with the predetermined position as the rotation center, while the driven member 560 connected to the driven member 550 has a linear motion. By causing the motion combined with the rotational motion to be performed, a change is imparted to the trajectory of the driven member 560 to enhance the effect. The operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  The rotating operation unit 600 includes a first rotating body 650 and a second rotating body 660 that are arranged concentrically, and by rotating both the rotating bodies 650 and 660, it is easy to associate both rotations with the player. Thus, the effect of rendering the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) is exhibited. The operation of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  In addition, the projecting operation unit 700 includes a projecting member 710 formed so as to be slidable, and the projecting operation unit 800 includes a projecting member 810 formed so as to be rotatable, and the projecting member 710 and the projecting member 810 are provided. Is displaced or rotated between a retracted position shown in FIG. 5 and an overhanging position (not shown) that projects to the front (front side) of the opening 301 (see the third symbol display device 81, see FIG. 2). To move (displace).

  Next, the protruding operation unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400 in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position. FIG. 8A is an exploded front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400, and FIG. 8B is a rear perspective view of the connecting rod 460.

  7 and 8 show a state in which the projecting operation unit 700 sharing the case body 410 with the projecting operation unit 400 is provided side by side with the projecting operation unit 400. In addition, a pair of protruding operation units 400 are disposed on the left and right sides of the intrusion operation unit 700 below the opening 301 (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of protruding operation units 400 are formed symmetrically. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the projecting operation unit 400 includes a case body 410 having a skeleton on the back side, a drive motor 420 disposed on the front side of the case body 410, and the drive motor 420. A plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, and crank gear 433) that transmit the rotational driving force, a base side displacement member 440 that is rotatably supported by case body 410, and a slide displacement to base side displacement member 440 A relative displacement member 450 that can be disposed, and a connection rod 460 that connects the relative displacement member 450 and the crank gear 433 and is rotatably supported by the case body 410 are mainly configured. The

  The case body 410 is made of a resin material, and a housing recess 411 having an outer shape corresponding to a plurality of gears (respective gears 431, 432, and 433) is provided on the front surface (front surface) of the case body 410. A rod support shaft 412 protrudes from the side of the storage recess 411 (right side of FIG. 8A), and a base support shaft 413 protrudes below the storage recess 411 (lower side of FIG. 8A). Each of the support shafts 412 and 413 is made of a brass material, and is disposed in a posture parallel to the rotation shaft of each of the gears 431 to 433.

  In this embodiment, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, as will be described later, the displacement members 440 and 450, the connecting rod 460, the gears 431, 432, and 433, Are stacked in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 13), a storage recess 411 is provided in front of the case body 410, and the gears 431, 432, and 433 are stored in the storage recess 411, respectively. Thus, the protrusion operation unit 400 can be reduced in size in the front-rear direction.

  A pinion gear 431 is attached to the drive shaft of the drive motor 420, and an intermediate gear 432 is engaged with the pinion gear 431, and a crank gear 433 is engaged with the intermediate gear 432. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the drive motor 420 is rotationally driven and the pinion gear 431 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the crank gear 433 via the intermediate gear 432, and the crank gear 433 is rotated.

  The intermediate gear 432 and the crank gear 433 are pivotally supported on the case body 410. Each of the gears 431 to 433 is formed as a spur gear whose teeth are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. In this case, the crank gear 433 is formed with a radial decoration on the front surface (axial end surface), and the diameter of the front portion (axial end surface) is larger than the tooth tip circle engraved on the outer peripheral surface. It is made large so that the teeth can be shielded from the player in front view.

  A crank pin 433a projects from a front surface (end surface in the axial direction) of the crank gear 433 at a position eccentric from the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433. The crank pin 433a is a portion connected to the connecting rod 460, is formed as a cylindrical body parallel to the rotation shaft of the crank gear 433, and is slidably inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460. (See FIGS. 9 and 10). Thus, when the crank gear 433 is rotated, the rotation is transmitted to the connecting rod 460 via the crank pin 433a.

  The base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are effect members for performing an effect by being displaced from the retracted position to the extended position (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the base side displacement member 440 (shaft support). The hole 442) is rotatably supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and a relative displacement member 450 is slidably disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member 440.

  Here, the relative displacement member 450 is formed with a decorative portion 454 on the front side thereof. The decoration part 454 is a part for decorating the front side of the relative displacement member 450, and is from the base end side (the rotation center side when the base displacement member 440 is rotated, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8). The whole is formed into a tapered shape in front view that becomes narrower toward the distal end side (the rotational distal end side when the proximal end displacement member 440 is rotated, the upper side in FIGS. 7 and 8), and the front surface of the decorative portion 454. The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged along the longitudinal direction.

  The first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c of the decorative portion 454 are formed in a size corresponding to the tapered shape of the entire decorative portion 454. In other words, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle have six large outer shapes, respectively. It is formed in a square shape.

  In this case, the first portion 454a, the second portion 454b, and the third portion 454c are arranged at different positions in the front-rear direction (positions in the vertical direction in FIG. 5). Specifically, the second portion 454b positioned in the middle of the first portion 454a positioned on the distal end side and the third portion 454c positioned on the proximal end side of the second portion 454b positioned in the middle are respectively in front. It is arranged on the (front) side (the front side in FIG. 5).

  Accordingly, the decorative portion 454 of the relative displacement member 450 (that is, the front surface of the relative displacement member 450) is moved from the proximal end side (the rotation center side of the proximal displacement member 440, the lower side of FIGS. 7 and 8) to the distal end side ( The base end displacement member 440 is inclined downwardly in a stepped manner (three steps in the present embodiment) in a direction approaching the case body 410 as it goes toward the rotational distal end side of FIG. 7 and FIG.

  Thus, as will be described later, when the base-side displacement member 440 is rotated (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the decoration member 480 is prevented from contacting the decoration member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17). When both the displacement members 440 and 450 pass through the back side of the lens, the effect of the production is improved and the relative displacement member 450 is projected (see FIG. 15). ) To improve the force.

  The detailed configuration of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described later (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

  The connecting rod 460 is a long plate-shaped member for transmitting the rotation of the crank gear 433 to the relative displacement member 450, and includes a shaft support hole 461 formed as a circular hole at one end in the longitudinal direction, and a shaft thereof. A connection hole 462 formed as a long hole extending along the longitudinal direction on the other end side in the longitudinal direction opposite to the support hole 461, and between the shaft support hole 461 and the connection hole 462 in the longitudinal direction. And a rod groove 463 that is recessed on the back surface side as a recessed groove extending along.

  The connecting rod 460 is attached to the case body 410 in a state where the rod support shaft 412 of the case body 410 is inserted into the shaft support hole 461 and the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463. Further, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 (see FIGS. 11 and 12). Thereby, as will be described later, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation with the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIGS. 9 and 10), and with the rotation of the connecting rod 460, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are rotated (first operation) and slide-displaced (second operation) (see FIG. 12), and are operated (displaced) between the retracted position and the extended position.

  In this case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the drive motor 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 are respectively disposed on the front surface (one surface) side of the case body 410. Compared with the case where the base body displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed on the front surface (one surface) side, and the drive motor 420 is disposed on the back surface (other surface) side, respectively, with the case body 410 interposed therebetween. The size of the unit 400 in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

  Furthermore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive motor 420 is positioned on the longitudinal extension line (see FIG. 13A), these drive motors. 420, the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 can be linearly arranged. Therefore, the space required as the retracted position on the front side of the case body 410 can be efficiently suppressed.

  In the present embodiment, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is cranked together with a plurality of gears (each gear 431 to 433) and the crank gear 433. The connecting rod 460 constituting the mechanism is connected to the connecting rod 460 (the connection hole 462 and the rod groove 463), the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433, and the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450, as will be described later. Are disposed in a region between the rod support shaft 411 and the base support shaft 412 of the case body 410, the transmission means (the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460) and the support shafts 411 and 412. Set the placement.

  Thereby, in a state where the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are disposed at the retracted position, the transmission means is disposed in a region overlapping the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 in front view. can do. That is, the dead space formed on the back side of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means. As a result, in addition to the effect of the positional relationship between the drive motor 420, the base displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 described above, it is possible to synergistically reduce the size of the protrusion operation unit 400 in the front-rear direction and the front view. it can.

  Next, the operation of the transmission means (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432, crank gear 433, and connecting rod 460) will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10 are schematic front views schematically showing the transmission means in the front view. FIG. 9A shows a state where the crank gear 433 is arranged at the first rotation position in FIG. 9B. FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the intermediate rotational position, and FIG. 10 shows a state in which the crank gear 433 is arranged at the second rotational position.

  9 and 10 schematically illustrate the shapes of the gears 431 to 433 and the connecting rod 460 in order to simplify the drawings and facilitate understanding. 9 and 10, the positions of the center lines of the connecting rod 460 when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the intermediate rotation position, and the second rotation position are two positions P1, Pm, and P2. It is schematically illustrated using a dotted line.

  In the description of FIGS. 9 and 10, FIGS. 13 to 15 are referred to as appropriate. 9A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, and FIG. 9B corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 14A and 14B. FIG. 10 corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 9A, in a state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1, the base side displacement member 440 is at the retracted position and the relative displacement member 450 is at the retracted position. They are respectively arranged at the reference positions (see FIGS. 12A and 13). In this state, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is positioned at the upper end (the end portion on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotation position, the crank gear 433 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 9A (that is, the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are stretched). Rotation in the direction of retracting from the extended position to the retracted position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the extended position to the retracted position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to an electrical factor, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the retracted position by a simple mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crankpin 433a by the rod groove 463), and both the displacement members 440, 450 and the connecting rod 460 are the other. It is possible to avoid a collision with the member.

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9A, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod The connecting rod 460 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation. When the crank gear 433 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate rotation position as shown in FIG. 9B, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position Pm. In this state, the base displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the reference position (see FIGS. 12B and 14).

  When the crank gear 433 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 9A from the state shown in FIG. 9B, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 lowers the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460 at the lower end (rod After sliding toward the support shaft 412 (the end opposite to the support shaft 412), it is slid toward the upper end (the end on the rod support shaft 412 side), and the connecting rod 460 has the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation in FIG. a) It is rotated clockwise (clockwise). As a result, when the crank gear 433 reaches the second rotational position as shown in FIG. 10, the connecting rod 460 is positioned at the position P2. In this state, the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed at the overhanging position (see FIGS. 12C and 15).

  Even when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is connected to the connecting rod as in the case where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position shown in FIG. It is located at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the rod groove 463 of 460.

  Therefore, when the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position, the crank gear 433 rotates clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 10 (that is, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are extended from the retracted position). Rotation in the direction of projecting to the position) can be regulated by bringing the crank pin 433a into contact with the upper end of the rod groove 463. Accordingly, when the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are arranged from the retracted position to the extended position, even if a control failure of the drive motor 420 occurs due to electrical factors, for example, The base-side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are displaced beyond the overhanging position by a special mechanism (a stopper mechanism that regulates the crank pin 433a by the rod groove 463), and the displacement members 440 and 450 and the connecting rod 460 are moved. Collision with other members can be avoided in advance.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the configuration and operation of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 will be described. FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the base-side displacement member 440 includes a main body portion 441 formed in a long plate shape, a shaft support hole 442 that is opened as a circular hole on the back surface of the main body portion 411, and a main body portion 441. The first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 formed as long holes extending along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) are mainly provided.

  The shaft support hole 442 is a hole through which the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410 is inserted, and by this insertion, the base side displacement member 440 can rotate to the case body 410 around the base side support shaft 413 as a rotation center. Is pivotally supported. That is, as will be described later, the base side displacement member 440 has a retracted position (see FIGS. 12A and 13) and a rotational position (see FIGS. 12B, 12C, 14 and 15). And is supported rotatably.

  In this case, the shaft support hole 442 is formed at a position below the center in the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 411 and biased to one side (an overhang position side) from the center in the width direction of the main body portion 411. As a result, the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can reduce the rotation angle required for the base side displacement member 440 so that the base side displacement member 440 protrudes from the outer edge of the case body 410 by a predetermined amount (predetermined area). The time required to rotate the displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position can be shortened, and as a result, the effect of the presentation due to the displacement of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enhanced.

  The relative displacement member 450 includes a main body portion 451 formed in a long plate shape, a connection pin 452 protruding from the back surface of the main body portion, and a predetermined interval along the longitudinal direction of the main body portion 451 (the vertical direction in FIG. 11). A pair of slide pins 453 arranged with a space therebetween, and a decorative portion 454 disposed on the front surface of the main body portion 451 are mainly provided.

  The connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are cylindrical portions that are slidably inserted into the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444 of the base-side displacement member 440, respectively. By the insertion, the relative displacement member 450 is inserted. Is arranged to be slidable along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base side displacement member 440. That is, as will be described later, the relative displacement member 450 has a reference position (see FIGS. 12A, 12B, 13 and 14) and an overhang position (see FIGS. 12C and 15). The base-side displacement member 440 is slidably displaceable between the two.

  In this case, the connection pin 452 is slidably inserted into the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 at the distal end side protruding from the first slide hole 443 of the base side displacement member 440, and the relative displacement member 450 is thereby inserted. It is connected to a crank gear 433 (see FIG. 8) via a connecting rod 460.

  Thus, as will be described later, by rotating the crank gear 433, the connecting rod 460 is rotated about the rod support shaft 412 (see FIG. 9), so that the base side relative to the base side support shaft 413 is the center of rotation. The rotation (first operation) of the displacement member 450 can be executed, and the slide displacement (second operation) of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be executed (see FIG. 12).

  Here, the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 are disposed at different positions (with a gap) along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction in FIG. 11) of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, since the location where the relative displacement member 450 is connected to the base side displacement member 440 can be dispersed in the longitudinal direction, the front and rear direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 (the direction of approaching and separating from the case body 410). ) Can be suppressed and the slide displacement can be stabilized.

  Further, the connection pin 452 is arranged on the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450 (upper side in FIG. 11) than the slide pin 453. Thereby, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be brought closer to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member 450. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member 450 is supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 can be moved away from the shaft support hole 442 of the base side displacement member 440 to the distal end side in the longitudinal direction (upper side in FIG. 11). As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 from swinging in the front-rear direction (direction approaching and separating from the case body 410).

  That is, only the longitudinal direction base side (the shaft support hole 442) of the base side displacement member 440 is supported by the base side support shaft 413 of the case body 410, and the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440. Because of the structure, the distal ends in the longitudinal direction of both displacement members 440 and 450 are free ends, and the distal ends are likely to swing in the front-rear direction during the first operation. This shaking may cause the tip side to come into contact with the decorative member 480. Therefore, a structure in which the position supported by the case body 410 via the connecting rod 460 is the front end side in the longitudinal direction is effective.

  A collar C is rotatably fitted on the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453. Since the collar C is interposed between the outer peripheral surfaces of the connection pin 452 and the slide pin 453 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the first slide hole 443 and the second slide hole 444, the collar C is provided along the slide holes 443 and 444. The pins 452 and 453 can be slid smoothly. Further, the collar C (specifically, the large-diameter flange portion of the collar C) is interposed between the main body 441 of the base-side displacement member 440, the main body 451 of the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460. The opposing distances between the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450, and the connecting rod 460 can be kept constant.

  The connection pin 452 is secured to the end surface on the tip side by a disk-like disk S with screws, so that the connection pin 452 is prevented from coming off from the connecting rod 460, and the slide pin 453 is an end surface on the tip side. A long flat slide guide 470 is fastened and fixed by a screw to prevent the base side displacement member 440 from coming off.

  FIG. 12 is a rear perspective view of the base displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450. 12A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 13 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the first rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P1). FIG. 12B corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 9B and FIG. 14 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the intermediate rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position Pm). . FIG. 12C corresponds to the state illustrated in FIGS. 10 and 15 (that is, the state where the crank gear 433 is disposed at the second rotational position and the connecting rod 460 is disposed at the position P2).

  As shown in FIG. 12A, in the state where the connecting rod 460 is located at the position P1 (see FIGS. 9A and 13), the rotation is performed with the base side support shaft 413 of the base side displacement member 440 as the rotation center. The reference position where the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 is the position where the amount of protrusion from the base side displacement member 440 is the minimum is the retracted position where the position is closest to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at each position. In this state, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is positioned at the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12A, the connecting rod 460 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9A) rotates. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the lower end (end opposite to the rod support shaft 412) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460, and the relative displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are relative to each other. The displacement member 450 is rotated clockwise (clockwise) in FIG. 12A together with the relative displacement member 450 with the proximal support shaft 413 as the rotation center (first operation). When the connecting rod 460 is further rotated and reaches the intermediate position Pm as shown in FIG. 12B (see FIGS. 9B and 14), the rotational position of the base side displacement member 440 is changed to the rod support shaft 412. It is arranged at a rotational position that is the most distant from the position.

  In this case, the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 can be maintained at the reference position. That is, when the connecting rod 460 is rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12A around the rod support shaft 412 as the center of rotation, the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 and the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 are moved downward. Since the sliding direction is a direction substantially along the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is moved relative to the base displacement member 440. Does not generate force component in the direction of sliding displacement. Therefore, while maintaining the slide position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 (while restricting the occurrence of slide displacement from the reference position), the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the center of rotation is used. Only rotation can be generated.

  As a result, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be rotated about the base support shaft 413 in a state in which the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum. The separation distance between the rotation tip of the relative displacement member 450 and the drive motor 420 (see FIG. 7) and the decorative member 480 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the size of the projecting operation unit 400 and to increase the degree of design freedom when defining the shape of the decorative member 480.

  From the state shown in FIG. 12B, the rotation of the crank gear 433 (see FIG. 9B) causes the connecting rod 460 to turn counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. When rotated, the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 is slid toward the upper end (end on the rod support shaft 412 side) of the connection hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 and then the lower end (opposite to the rod support shaft 412). And the relative displacement member 450 is slid and displaced with respect to the proximal displacement member 440 in a direction extending along the longitudinal direction (first and second slide holes 443 and 444). (Second operation). As a result, when the connecting rod 460 reaches the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 12C (see FIGS. 10 and 15), the sliding position of the relative displacement member 450 with respect to the base side displacement member 440 becomes the base position. It is arranged at the overhang position where the overhang amount from the side displacement member 440 is the maximum.

  In this case, the rotational position of the base-side displacement member 440 can be maintained at the rotational position that is the most distant from the rod support shaft 412. That is, the rotation of the connecting rod 460 counterclockwise (counterclockwise) in FIG. 12B about the rod support shaft 412 as the rotation center moves the connecting pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 along the connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460. Since the sliding direction is substantially perpendicular to the sliding displacement direction of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base displacement member 440, the relative displacement member 450 is slid relative to the base displacement member 440. Only the force component in the direction of displacement is generated, and the force component in the direction of rotating the base side displacement member 440 around the base side support shaft 413 is not generated. Therefore, it is possible to generate only the slide displacement of the relative displacement member 450 relative to the base side displacement member 440 while restricting the rotation of the base side displacement member 440 with the base side support shaft 413 as the rotation center.

  Thereby, the base displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position in a state where the amount of protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the base side displacement member 440 is kept to a minimum (the state where the relative displacement member 450 is maintained at the reference position). Rotation to a position (first operation), and after the first operation is completed, the relative displacement member is in a state where the rotation of the base displacement member 440 is restricted (the base displacement member 440 is maintained at the rotation position). A slide displacement (second operation) for extending 450 along the longitudinal direction with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 can be performed. In other words, since the rotation operation and the slide operation can be separated and each can be performed in two stages as separate operations, different operations can be performed in the game compared to the case where the rotation operation and the slide operation are performed simultaneously. Can be clearly recognized, and the effect of rendering by displacing the displacement members 440 and 450 can be enhanced.

  The operation of the protruding operation unit 400 configured as described above will be described with reference to FIGS.

  13 to 15 are front views of the protruding operation unit 400. FIG. As described above, FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 12 (a), and FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) 9 (b) and FIG. 12 (b), and FIGS. 15 (a) and 15 (b) correspond to the states shown in FIGS. 10 and 12 (c). FIGS. 13B, 14B, and 15B show a state in which the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are removed.

  As shown in FIGS. 13 to 15, according to the protruding operation unit 400, as described above, the base side displacement member 440 is moved to the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A and FIGS. 14A and 15A. ) And a relative displacement member 450 disposed on the base-side displacement member 440 is formed between the reference position shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 14 (a). A first operation that is formed so as to be slidable between the overhanging position shown in FIG. 15A and rotates the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the relative displacement member 450 is base side displaced. The second operation of displacing the member 440 between the reference position and the overhang position can be performed.

  As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13A and 14A, the base side displacement member 440 in the retracted position is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 in the reference position is set in the second position. By slidably moving (extending) to the extended position by the operation, the relative displacement member 450 can be extended outward from the base side displacement member 440 as shown in FIG. Therefore, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged as a whole, both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14A, the base side displacement member 440 is arranged at the rotational position by the first operation, so that the distal end portion of the relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the decorative portion). The entire first portion 454a of 454) can be visually recognized by the player through the opening of the center frame 86, and as shown in FIG. By disposing, the player can visually recognize substantially the entire relative displacement member 450 (in this embodiment, the entire third portion 454a of the striking decoration portion 454) through the opening of the center frame 86.

  That is, the relative displacement member 450 that has been retracted to the retracted position and cannot be visually recognized from the opening of the center frame 86 is first caused to appear from the side to the opening of the center frame 86 by a rotational motion (first operation). In addition, the player can visually recognize only a part of the relative displacement member 450, and is then projected toward the center of the opening of the center frame 86 by a linear motion (second motion). An effect of allowing the player to visually recognize the whole can be performed. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member 450 can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion). It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed due to the enlargement and a sense of unity of the combined actions that are performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is projected and retracted with respect to the opening of the center frame 86 only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retraction position and the overhang position are reciprocated).

  On the other hand, when the base-side displacement member at the rotational position is disposed at the retracted position shown in FIG. 13A by the first operation, as shown in FIGS. When the relative displacement member 450 is slid (displaced) to the reference position by the second operation, the outward protrusion of the relative displacement member 450 from the proximal displacement member 440 can be suppressed. Therefore, since both displacement members 440 and 450 can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate both displacement members 440 and 450 in the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  In this case, as described above, the relative displacement member 450 is disposed on the base side displacement member 440 in a slidable state, and the second operation is performed as shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 15 (a). Since the relative displacement member 440 is slidably displaced between the reference position and the overhang position with respect to the base side displacement member 450, for example, the second operation moves the relative displacement member 440 with respect to the base side displacement member 450. Compared to the case of rotating, the space required to displace the relative displacement member 440 from the reference position to the extended position can be reduced, and other parts and devices are arranged accordingly. Space can be secured. Further, since the displacement mode (slide displacement) of the relative displacement member 450 by the second operation can be different from the displacement mode (rotation) of the base side displacement member 450 by the first operation, The effect of performing the first operation and the second operation continuously can be enhanced.

  Particularly, in the second operation, the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction of the both displacement members 440 and 450. That is, the relative displacement member 450 is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member 440, and is slid and displaced in the direction along the longitudinal direction of each of the displacement members 440, 450 can be efficiently extended and shortened as a whole. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 15A, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotation position, the displacement member 440 is enlarged as a whole by sliding displacement (extension) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be made sufficiently visible to the player, and the effects can be fully exhibited. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 13A, in the state in which the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position, both the displacement members 440 are reduced by reducing the overall displacement by the sliding displacement (shortening) of the relative displacement member 450. , 450 can be reduced, and a space for arranging other parts and devices can be secured.

  Moreover, according to the protrusion operation unit 400, as described above, the transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 to the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 15 (b) and FIG. 15 (b), it is composed of a plurality of gears (pinion gear 431, intermediate gear 432 and crank gear 433) and a connecting rod 460, and together with the crank gear 433, a connecting hole 462 of the connecting rod 460 constituting the crank mechanism. Is connected to the connection pin 452 of the relative displacement member 450 in a region between the rod support shaft 411 that is the rotation center of the connecting rod 460 and the base support shaft 412 that is the rotation center of the proximal displacement member 440. Therefore, by rotating the crank gear 433, the first operation and the second operation by the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are performed. , It can be executed in the order. That is, since two different operations, the first operation and the second operation, can be performed by only one drive motor 420, the component cost can be reduced, and the product cost can be reduced accordingly.

  In this case, as the transmission means, a structure in which a gear is provided on the rod support shaft 412 side of the connecting rod 460 and the teeth of the crank gear 433 are meshed with the gear to rotate the connecting rod 460 can be considered. Then, since the crank gear 433 and the connecting rod 460 are provided side by side in a plane and an overlap margin is not formed in a front view, a space necessary for the arrangement increases. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the crank pin 433a of the crank gear 433 is inserted into the rod groove 463 of the connecting rod 460, which is shown in FIGS. 13 (a), 14 (b) and 15 (b). As described above, the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be arranged in a state where the overlap margin is always present in a front view, and the space necessary for the arrangement of the crank gear 433 and the connection link 460 can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Next, the relationship between the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 470 when the proximal displacement member 440 is rotated (first operation) will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17.

  FIG. 16 is a front perspective view of the protruding operation unit 400. 17A is a side view of the protruding operation unit 400 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XVIIa in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17B is a partially enlarged side view of the protruding operation unit 400 in the portion XVIIb in FIG. It is. 16 and 17 show a state where the decorative member 480 is attached to the protruding operation unit 400. However, in order to simplify the drawing and facilitate understanding, only the decorative member 480 necessary for explaining the relationship with the relative displacement member 400 is shown.

  As shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the projecting operation unit 400 is provided with a decorative member 480 on the upper side (upper side in FIG. 16) (see FIGS. 5 and 6). The decorative member 480 is a decorative resin member and is formed from a light-transmitting resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize other members positioned on the back side of the decorative member 480 through the decorative member 480.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative member 480 is formed so that a part thereof projects downward (lower side in FIG. 17B), and as shown in FIG. 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are formed to have an overlap margin of dimension L. Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation trajectories of the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 are It can overlap with a part of the decorative member 480 in a front view.

  That is, since the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 can be displaced in a state where the back side of the decoration member 480 is passed, an operation of crossing the decoration member 480 and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be performed. At the time of the intersection, the decorative member 480 is allowed to pass through so that both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. As a result, it is possible to enhance the rendering effect by displacing both the displacement members 440 and 450. In particular, in the present embodiment, the front end side of the substrate displacement member 440 that is separated from the decoration member 480 protrudes from the front end side of the relative displacement member 450 that is close to the decoration member 480, so that it is difficult to contact the decoration member 480. As a result, the dimension L which is the overlap allowance can be made larger. Therefore, the production effect by the intersection can be enhanced.

  In this case, as described above, the decorative portion 454 that forms the front side (the right side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is the base end side (the rotation center side of the base side displacement member 440, FIG. b) is inclined stepwise in a direction approaching the case body 410 (left side in FIG. 17B) from the lower side toward the distal end side (rotating distal end side of the base end displacement member 440, upper side in FIG. 17B). The Further, the distal end side of the base side displacement member 440 arranged on the back side (left side in FIG. 17B) of the relative displacement member 450 is protruded from the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450. Therefore, in the whole base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450, it can be set as the shape arrange | positioned in the position deepened to the case body 410 side (back side, FIG.17 (b) left side) toward the front end side.

  Thereby, when the base side displacement member 440 is rotated from the retracted position to the rotation position (first operation) (see FIGS. 13 and 14), the rotation locus is overlapped with the decoration member 480 in front view. In addition, it is possible to suppress the contact between the base side displacement member 440 and the relative displacement member 450 and the decorative member 480 while ensuring the improvement of the effect.

  In this case, the base-side displacement member 440 has a structure in which only one side in the longitudinal direction is pivotally supported by the base-side support shaft 413 and the tip side is a free end (see FIGS. 12A and 12B). ), During the first operation, the tip end side tends to swing in the front-rear direction (the direction approaching and separating from the case body 410 side, the vertical direction in FIG. 5), and the contact with the decorative member 480 is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration according to the present embodiment (a shape that is inclined so that the distal end side is closer to the case body 410) is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, the relative displacement member 450 does not have the entire decorative portion 454 close to the case body 410 side, but, as described above, the distal end side (the rotational distal end side of the proximal end displacement member 440, FIG. 17B). The shape is located closer to the front side (front side) (right side in FIG. 17B) toward the base end side (upper rotation side of the base side displacement member 440, lower side in FIG. 17B) than the upper side. That is, the decorative portion 454 is inclined upward in a stepped manner in a direction away from the case body 410 (right side in FIG. 17B) as it goes from the distal end side to the proximal end side.

  As a result, when the relative displacement member 450 is slidably displaced (second operation) from the reference position to the extended position (see FIGS. 14 and 15), the relative displacement member 440 is moved further forward (ie, forward) (that is, forward). It can be placed on the side close to the player) to increase the force. In particular, in this embodiment, since the outer shape is enlarged toward the portion (the second portion 454b than the first portion 454a and the third portion 454c than the second portion 454b) arranged on the front (front) side, The effect of enhancing the effect can be further exhibited.

  Next, the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19 are front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 18 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 5), and FIG. 19 illustrates a state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 5). The

  Here, in the composite operation unit 500, a pair of left and right is disposed above the opening 301 with the rotary operation unit 600 interposed therebetween (see FIGS. 5 and 6), and the pair of composite operation units 500 are symmetrical. Since the structure is substantially the same, only one (the one disposed on the right side of the front view) will be described, and the description of the other (the one disposed on the left side of the front view) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the composite operation unit 500 displaces the driven member 550 by the driving force of the driving motor 530 and also drives the driven member 560 in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. Then, the driven member 560 is displaced between the retracted position shown in FIG. 18 and the extended position shown in FIG. In this case, the driven member 560 is driven by the driven member 550 while changing the relative position with respect to the driven member 550 by rotation and slide displacement, as will be described later (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  As a result, even when the driven member 550 is rotated at a constant speed around a predetermined position (shaft portions 553 and 554) as a rotation center, the driven member 550 is driven by a different path from the driven member 550. The member 560 can be displaced, and a change can be given to the displacement mode of the driven member 560. That is, according to the combined operation unit 500, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while maintaining the output of the drive motor 530 constant. The detailed configuration of the composite operation unit 500 will be described below.

  20 and 21 are exploded front perspective views of the combined operation unit 500. FIG. 22A is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and FIG. 22B is a front view of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 as viewed in the direction of the arrow XXIIb in FIG. It is a side view.

  20 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 18 is disassembled, and FIG. 21 corresponds to a state where the combined operation unit 500 illustrated in FIG. 19 is disassembled. FIGS. 22A and 22B correspond to the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 in the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the composite operation unit 500 includes a front case body 510 and a back case body 520 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 530 disposed on the back side of the back case body 520, and driving thereof. The crank member 540 attached to the drive shaft 531 of the motor 530, the driven member 550 driven by the driving force of the drive motor 530 transmitted through the crank member 540, and the relative displacement to the driven member 550 A driven member 560 that can be connected is mainly provided.

  The front case body 510 and the rear case body 520 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are disposed to face each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. A driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), a driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561), and a crank member 540 are respectively provided in the internal spaces (between opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. Housed in a displaceable state.

  The front case body 510 includes a shaft support hole 511, an insertion hole 512, and a first guide groove 513. The shaft support hole 511 is a circular hole in front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 540. The insertion hole 512 is an opening through which the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is inserted, and is formed in a size that allows the reciprocating movement of the crank pin 541. The crank pin 541 can be connected to the driven member 560 (drive shaft 561a) through the insertion hole 512.

  The first guide groove 513 is an opening through which the first pin 561a in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, 27A to 29A). The groove width of the first guide groove 513 is set to a size that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the first pin 561a. As will be described later, the first pin 561a is slid along the extending direction of the first guide groove 513. By moving (guiding), the posture of the interposed plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative rotational position with respect to the driven member 550) can be defined (see FIGS. 27 (a) to 29 (a)). .

  The back case body 520 includes a shaft support hole 521, an insertion hole 522, and a second guide groove 523. The shaft support hole 521 is a circular hole in a front view for rotatably supporting the shaft portion 554 of the driven member 540, and is disposed concentrically with the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510 described above. In other words, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 have their shaft support holes 511 and 521 that respectively support the shaft portions 553 and 554 of the driven member 550 so that the driven member 550 can be rotated. I can support it. The insertion hole 522 is an opening through which the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 is inserted, and the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 can be connected to the crank member 540 through the insertion hole 522.

  The second guide groove 513 is an opening through which the connection shaft 561b in the interposed plate portion 561 of the driven member 560 is inserted, and a shape obtained by extracting a part of the annular shape (that is, a groove shape curved in an arc shape, FIG. 27 (b) to FIG. 29 (b)). The groove width of the second guide groove 523 is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b, and the connection shaft 561b is slid along the extending direction of the second guide groove 523, as will be described later. By (guidance), it is possible to define the posture of the interposition plate portion 561 (the driven member 560) (in particular, the relative slide position with respect to the driven member 550) (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  As described above, the crank member 540 is attached to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530, and the crank member 540 is eccentric from the rotation shaft (drive shaft 531) when being rotated by the drive motor 530. A crankpin 541 is disposed at the position. The crank pin 541 is inserted into the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a of the driven member 550, and the driven member 550 is rotated. (See FIGS. 30 to 32).

  As described above, the driven member 550 is a member that is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530 and that displaces the driven member 560 along with the rotation, and supports the shaft portions 553 and 554 as a shaft. By pivotally supporting the holes 511 and 521, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are rotatably held. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 550 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 23A is a front view of the driven member 550, and FIG. 23B is a back surface portion of the driven member 550. FIG. 24 is a side view of the driven member 550 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIV in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the driven member 550 includes a long plate-like front plate portion 551 and a long plate-like intervention that intersects the front plate portion 551 at a substantially right angle in front view. A plate portion 552, a columnar shaft portion 553 connecting the front plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552, and a circle protruding from the back surface of the interposed plate portion 552 at a position concentric with the shaft portion 553. A columnar shaft portion 554 is mainly provided.

  The front plate portion 551 is a member disposed on the front surface of the front case body 510 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and has an ellipse in front view on one end side (the side opposite to the side to which the shaft portion 553 is connected). A drive groove 551a is formed. The drive groove 551 a is an opening through which the crank pin 541 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the crank member 540 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the front plate portion 551. The groove width of the drive groove 551a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the crank pin 541. Therefore, by rotating the crank member 540 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank pin 541 can be slid along the drive groove 551a, and as a result, the shaft portion 553, 554 is rotated as a center of rotation. The drive member 550 can be rotated (see FIGS. 30 to 32).

  The interposed plate portion 552 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and one end thereof (the front stomach body portion 551). A connecting groove 552a having an oval shape in front view is formed on the side opposite to the side to which the is connected. The connection groove 552 a is an opening through which the connection shaft 561 b (see FIGS. 20 and 21) of the driven member 560 is inserted, and extends along the longitudinal direction of the interposed plate portion 552. The groove width of the connection groove 552a is set to a dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the diameter of the connection shaft 561b. Therefore, the connection groove 552a can hold the connection shaft 561b so as to be rotatable and slidable. That is, the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable (see FIGS. 27 to 29).

  Here, the connection groove 552a has a region that overlaps with the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 in a front view when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 554, and The connection shaft 561b is configured to be disposed within the region (see FIGS. 27A to 27C). Thereby, as will be described later, the sliding displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 can be defined based on the shape (contour) of the second guide groove 523.

  In the driven member 550, the interposed plate portion 552 and the shaft portions 553, 554 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the front plate portion 551 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 552-554, The axial direction end surface of the shaft portion 553 (the end surface opposite to the interposed plate portion 552) is brought into contact with the back surface of the base plate side of the front plate portion 551 (the side opposite to the side where the driving groove 551a is drilled), They are assembled by fastening them together with screws.

  In this case, four pins 553a project from the axial end surface of the shaft portion 553, and holes 551b for receiving the four pins 553a are provided at four locations on the base end side of the front plate portion 551. The pins 553a are assembled in a state of being received in the holes 551b. Thereby, the number of screws can be suppressed to reduce the component cost, and the flat plate portion 551 and the interposed plate portion 552 can be reliably made non-rotatable.

  Returning to FIG. 20 to FIG. As described above, the connecting shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted into the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 in the driven member 550, whereby the driven member is connected to the driving member 550. 560 is connected so that relative displacement (rotational and sliding displacement) is possible. As described above, the driven member 560 is a member that is driven in accordance with the displacement of the driving member 550, and the connecting shaft 561 b of the interposed plate portion 561 is connected to the connecting groove 552 a of the interposed plate portion 552 of the driven member 550. In addition, by being inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are held in a rotatable and slidable state. Here, the detailed configuration of the driven member 560 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 and 26.

  FIG. 25A is a front view of the driven member 560, and FIG. 25B is a back surface portion of the driven member 560. FIG. 26 is a side view of the driven member 560 in the direction of arrow XXVI in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the driven member 560 includes a plate-shaped interposed plate portion 561, a decorative portion 562 having a pair of elongated portions with a decorative shape formed on the front surface, A back plate portion 563 that is connected to the back side of the interposed plate portion 561 and that is connected to the side of the decorative portion 562 is mainly configured.

  The interposed plate portion 561 is a member disposed in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and the front case body 510 is located in front of the interposed plate portion 561. The first pin 561a inserted through the first guide groove 513 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) protrudes, and the connection shaft 561b protrudes from the back surface at a position eccentric to the first pin 561a. Is done. As described above, the connection shaft 561b is inserted into the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (the interposed plate portion 552) and the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21). .

  Therefore, when the driven member 550 is rotated about the shaft portions 553 and 5554, the first pin 561a is slid (guided) along the first guide groove 513, whereby the interposed plate portion 561 ( That is, the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the driven member 550 and the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b (see FIGS. 27A to 29A), and the connection shaft 561b. Is slid (guided) along the second guide groove 523, so that the driven plate 561 (that is, the driven member 560) has a direction along the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 as a sliding direction. It is slid relative to 550 (see FIGS. 27 (b) to 29 (b)).

  Here, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is inserted only into the connecting groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552), and a pin separately provided on the interposed plate portion 561 is inserted into the first pin of the rear case body 520. By inserting the two guide grooves 523, the same action as described above can be obtained.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the connection shaft 561b of the driven member 560 is provided in both the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520 and the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 (interposition plate portion 552). The displacement of the driven member 560 relative to the back case body 520 is regulated by being inserted into the connecting shaft 561b and guided by the second guide groove 523 (that is, the driven member 560 is slid relative to the driven member 550). ) And the role of connecting the driven member 560 to the driven member 550 so as to be capable of relative displacement (rotation and sliding displacement) by being inserted through the connection groove 561b. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  The back plate portion 563 is a circular member in a front view disposed on the back surface of the back case body 520 (see FIGS. 20 and 21), and a contact portion on the front surface (FIG. 25 (a), the front side surface of the paper). 563a is projected. The contact portion 563a is a portion that is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520, and is formed in an annular shape in front view concentric with the connection shaft 561b. That is, only the peripheral portion of the back plate portion 563 (the protruding front end surface of the contact portion 562a) is in contact with the back surface of the back case body 520.

  As described above, by providing the back plate 563 with the concentric contact portion 563 on the connection shaft 561b, when the connection shaft 561b slides (guides) along the second guide groove 523, the first pin 561a is provided. Even when the driven member 560 is rotated relative to the back case body 520 around the connection shaft 561b by the rotational action of the first guide groove 523 (see FIGS. 27 to 29), the back case body. It is possible to suppress a change in the support reaction force by keeping the contact state of the back surface of 520 constant. As a result, the driven member 560 can be displaced in a stable state.

  In the driven member 560, the decorative portion 562 and the back plate portion 563 are integrally formed from a resin material, while the interposing plate portion 561 is formed from a resin material as a separate member from these portions 562 and 563, and the back plate portion. Assembling is performed by bringing the end face in the axial direction of the connecting shaft 561b of the interposition plate portion 561 into contact with the front face of 563 and fastening and fixing them together with screws. The structure in which the plurality of pins 561c protruding from the axial end surface of the connecting shaft 561b are received in the plurality of holes 563b of the back plate portion 563, respectively, so that they are coupled so as not to rotate relative to each other is the above-described driven structure. Since it is the same as that of the member 550, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Returning to FIG. The combined operation unit 500 can be assembled as follows. First, the shaft portion 553 of the driven member 550 is inserted into the shaft support hole 511 of the front case body 510, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550 are fastened and fixed. Thereby, the driven member 550 can be assembled to the front case body 510 in a rotatable state. At the time of this assembly, the connection shaft 561b of the interposed plate portion 561 in the driven member 560 is inserted in advance into the connection groove 552 of the driven member 550 (interposed plate portion 552).

  Next, the crank member 540 is mounted on the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 through the insertion hole 522 of the back case body 520, and the driven member 550 is connected to the crank pin 541 through the insertion hole 512 of the front case body 510. The drive groove 551a of the (front plate portion 551) is inserted. In addition, the connecting shaft 561b of the driven member 560 (interposed plate portion 561) is inserted through the second guide groove 523 of the back case body 520, and the interposed plate portion 561 and the back plate portion 563 of the driven member 560 are fastened and fixed. To do. Thus, the driven member 560 can be assembled to the back case body 520 in a rotatable state, and can be connected to the driven member 550 in a rotatable and slidable state, and driven via the crank member 540. A state in which the rotational driving force of the motor 530 can be transmitted to the driven member 550 can be formed.

  Thereafter, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 are fastened and fixed by screws (not shown). Accordingly, the driven member 550 is displaced by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, and the driven member 560 can be displaced (driven) in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550. It can be unitized as one device. As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, the components can be assembled by sequentially assembling the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, so that the assembly cost can be reduced and the unit can be unitized. Thus, the assembly to the unit storage member 300 (the gaming machine main body, see FIGS. 5 and 6) can be facilitated, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

  Next, the operation of the combined operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 27A, 28A, and 29A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513. FIG. FIG. 28B and FIG. 29B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523.

  Similarly, FIG. 30A, FIG. 31A and FIG. 32A are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the first guide groove 513, and FIG. 30B and 30B are schematic front views of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560 showing the relationship with the second guide groove 523. FIG.

  27 and 30 correspond to the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position (the state illustrated in FIGS. 18 and 20), and FIGS. 29 and 32 illustrate the state in which the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position. This corresponds to the state (the state shown in FIGS. 19 and 20). The state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 corresponds to the state where the driven member 560 is disposed between the retracted position and the extended position.

  As shown in FIGS. 27 and 30, when the driven member 560 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is on the right side when viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. 30A). As a result, the driven member 550 tilts the front end side (formation portion of the drive groove 551a) of the front plate portion 551 to the right side (right side in FIG. 30 (b)) and the interposed plate. The front end side of the portion 552 (the portion where the connection groove 552a is formed) is lifted upward (upper side in FIG. 30B). That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is a rotation end point in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centered on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 lifts the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 upward, so that the connection shaft 561b is connected to the upper end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed up to the upper side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the uppermost position in the vertical direction (FIG. 30 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. In addition, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 positioned on the upper end side (the upper left side in FIG. 27A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side ( The first pin 561a is disposed in a horizontal posture with the left side of the first pin 561a facing leftward (left side in FIG. 27A). That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in a counterclockwise (front-turning) direction when viewed from the front centered on the connection shaft 561b.

  From the state where the driven member 560 shown in FIG. 27 and FIG. 30 is disposed at the retracted position, the crank member 540 rotates counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when the drive shaft 531 is rotating by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530. When rotated, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is slid along the drive groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has the shaft portions 553, 554 (FIG. 20 and FIG. 20). As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, the driven member 560 is rotated to a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position. Be placed.

  As shown in FIGS. 28 and 31, when the driven member 560 is disposed at a position approximately in the middle between the retracted position and the extended position, the driven member 550 causes the front plate portion 551 to be substantially upright, and to be interposed. The installation plate portion 552 is set to a substantially horizontal posture. That is, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the rotational center.

  On the other hand, in the driven member 560, the driven member 550 is positioned so that the interposed plate portion 552 is substantially horizontal, so that the connecting shaft 561b pushed down by the connecting groove 552a of the interposed plate portion 552 has the second The posture is set at an intermediate position of the guide groove 523. In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a substantially middle position in the displaceable range in the vertical direction (FIG. 31 (b) vertical direction), and the rightmost in the left / right direction (FIG. 30 (b) horizontal direction). It is arranged at the position. Further, the driven member 560 is disposed at a position where the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 is substantially in the middle of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 (of the first pin 561a). The inclined portion is disposed in an upper left direction (upper left side in FIG. 28A) in the front view. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is substantially in the middle of the rotatable range around the connection shaft 561b.

  When the crank member 540 is further rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front while the drive shaft 531 is rotating from the state shown in FIGS. 28 and 31 by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the crank member 540 The crank pin 541 is slid along the driving groove 551a in the front plate portion 551 of the driven member 550, so that the driven member 550 has a front surface with the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21) as the center of rotation. As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, the driven member 560 is arranged at the overhanging position by being rotated counterclockwise (counterclockwise).

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 32, in a state where the driven member 560 is disposed at the extended position, the crank pin 541 of the crank member 540 is the left side as viewed from the front with respect to the drive shaft 531 of the drive motor 530 (FIG. ), The driven member 550 is tilted from the front end side of the front plate portion 551 (the portion where the driving groove 551a is formed) to the left side of the front view (left side in FIG. 32 (b)). It is set as the attitude | position which dropped the front end side (formation part of the connection groove | channel 552a) of the board part 552 to the downward direction (FIG.32 (b) lower side). In other words, the driven member 550 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front centering on the shaft portions 553 and 554 (see FIGS. 20 and 21).

  On the other hand, as described above, the driven member 560 is in a posture in which the driven member 550 drops the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 552 downward, so that the connecting shaft 561b is connected to the lower end side of the second guide groove 523 ( The posture is pushed down to the lower side of FIG. That is, the driven member 560 is disposed at the lowest position in the vertical direction (FIG. 32 (b) vertical direction) and at the leftmost position in the horizontal direction (FIG. 32 (b) horizontal direction). Is done. Further, the driven member 560 has the first pin 561a of the interposed plate portion 561 located on the lower end side (the lower right side in FIG. 29A) of the first guide groove 513, so that the distal end side of the interposed plate portion 561 is provided. The upright posture is such that (the portion where the first pin 561a is disposed) is directed upward (upper side in FIG. 29 (a)). In other words, the driven member 560 is disposed at a rotational position that is the end of rotation in the clockwise direction (clockwise) when viewed from the front centering on the connection shaft 561b.

  As described above, according to the combined operation unit 500, when the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 530, the driven member 560 is moved along with the displacement of the driven member 550. The drive member 550 can be driven while being relatively displaced. That is, the mode of displacement of the driven member 550 is rotation about the shafts 533 and 554, and even when the driven member 550 is displaced along a constant path, the path (displacement) is different from that of the driven member 550. The driven member 560 can be displaced in the above-described manner. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550, even if the driven member 550 is displaced (rotated) at a constant speed, The driven member 560 can be displaced by a different path (displacement mode) from the driven member 550. As a result, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member 560 while keeping the output of the drive motor 530 constant.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, the means for displacing the driven member 560 relative to the driven member 550 (displacement defining means) is the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove of the front case body 510 and the back case body 520. 523, the first pin 561a of the driven member 560, and the connection shaft 561b. In other words, the first pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are guided along the guide grooves 513 and 523, whereby the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the case bodies 510 and 520 can be defined. Thereby, the relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be formed in accordance with the outline (shape) of each guide groove 513, 523. As a result, the displacement defining means can be formed by a mechanical element such as a guide groove and a shaft-like body guided by the guide groove, and the structure thereof is simplified, so that the product cost can be reduced. In addition, since simple mechanical elements can be employed, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  Further, by setting the contours (shapes) of the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be arbitrarily set, so that the displacement of the driven member 560 is reduced. It is possible to increase the degree of design freedom when setting the mode. As a result, it is possible to easily ensure variations in the displacement modes that can be applied to the driven member 560.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the driven member 560 is connected to the driven member 550 so as to be rotatable and slidable, a first guide groove 513 and a first pin 561a are used to mainly define the rotation. A guide structure and a second guide structure that is configured by the second guide groove 523 and the connecting shaft 561b and mainly defines the slide displacement are provided. Thereby, not only the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased, but even when the displacement of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 is a plurality of types (rotation and slide displacement), each of these displacements is changed to the first. And it can guide appropriately by the 2nd guidance structure, respectively. As a result, the displacement of the driven member 560 can be stabilized, and the reliability as the movable member can be improved.

  Here, in the first guide structure described above, for example, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the interposed plate portion 561 or the back plate portion 563, and the first pin 561a is formed in the front case body 510 or the back case body 520, respectively. This is true even in a configuration where On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510, and the first pin 561a is formed in the interposed plate portion 561. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space for forming the first guide groove 513.

  That is, the front case body 510 and the back case body 520 need to hold both the members 550 and 560 while securing the displacement space of the driven member 550 and the driven member 560, and therefore, they need not be formed in a relatively large outer shape. There is a tendency that a dead space is formed on the plate surface. Therefore, by forming the first guide groove portion 513 as the front case body 510, a space for forming the first guide groove 513 can be sufficiently secured by effectively using the dead space. As a result, it becomes possible to increase the degree of freedom of the contour (shape) and the extension length of the first guide groove 513, and accordingly, it is possible to increase variations of changes that can be imparted to the displacement mode. In addition, since it is the same as that of the case of the 1st guide structure also about the 2nd guide structure, the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Further, the first guide structure and the second guide structure are also realized by a configuration in which both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first guide groove 513 is formed in the front case body 510 and the second guide groove 523 is formed in the back case body 520, respectively. Therefore, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed. Can be formed without considering each other's formation position.

  That is, when both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the back case body 520, it is necessary to form the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom in designing the contour (shape) and extension length is limited. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, in both the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the contour (shape) and the extended length are arbitrarily set without considering the positional relationship with the other party. Therefore, the degree of freedom of the design can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  Next, the rotation operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a front perspective view of the rotary operation unit 600.

  As shown in FIG. 33, the rotational operation unit 600 includes a spherical liquid crystal device 670 in which a first rotator 650 having an annular shape in front view is disposed so as to surround the periphery thereof, and the back surface of the first rotator 650. A second rotating body 660 having an annular shape in front view is concentrically disposed on the side, and in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are rotated at different rotational speeds and in opposite directions.

  Here, in the conventional product in which a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged at positions separated from each other, it is difficult to make the player recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies in association with each other. That is, the conventional product is a form in which each rotating body is rotated independently without being associated with other rotating bodies, and therefore, the effect of rendering by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies is sufficiently exhibited. I couldn't let you.

  On the other hand, according to the rotation operation unit 600 in the present embodiment, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are arranged concentrically around the spherical liquid crystal device 670, and the two rotating bodies rotate differently. Since it is rotated in a mode (a mode in which the rotation speed and the rotation direction are different from each other), these rotations can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and the effect of rendering can be achieved by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies. it can. The detailed configuration of the rotational operation unit 600 will be described below.

  FIG. 34 is an exploded front perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600, and FIG. 35 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rotational operation unit 600. FIG. 36 is a longitudinal sectional view of the rotary operation unit 600. 35 and 36, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is not shown. 36 corresponds to the cross section of the rotary operation unit 600 cut by a plane including the rotation centers of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As shown in FIGS. 34 to 36, the rotary operation unit 600 includes a front case body 610 and a back case body 620 that form the skeleton, a drive motor 630 disposed on the back side of the back case body 620, and driving thereof. A plurality of gears (first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and a front gear 646) as transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the motor 630 and the rotational driving force of the driving motor 630 are transmitted via the plurality of gears. Of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 which are rotated by being rotated, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, and the front case body 610. The light emitting device 680 disposed on the front is mainly provided.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are formed in a flat plate shape from a resin material, and are opposed to each other with a predetermined interval therebetween, and are fastened and fixed to each other by screws (not shown). It is comprised as an accommodating member in which an internal space is formed between the opposing surfaces. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 are stored in the internal spaces (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, respectively.

  The front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are respectively formed with openings 611 and 621 that are circular in front view, and these openings 611 and 621 are arranged concentrically in the assembled state. On the front side of the front case body 610, a cylindrical tubular portion 612 is provided projecting toward the front (front) at a position concentric with the openings 611 and 621. In the front case body 610, the inner diameter of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 is set to the same size, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 610 rotates on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612. Supported as possible. In addition, the second rotating body 620 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body 651) and the second rotating body 660 are rotatably supported by the inner peripheral surface and the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. The arrangement positions of the rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be defined with respect to the front case body 610, respectively. Therefore, as will be described later, gears (first and second outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a) engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second rotating body 660, and the front surface The positional relationship between the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 disposed on the case body 610 can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state between the outer peripheral gears 653a and 661a of the rotating bodies 650 and 660 and the second housing gear 642 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. Can be suppressed.

  The drive motor 630 has a pinion gear 631 attached to its drive shaft, and is attached to the back surface of the back case body 620, whereby the pinion gear 631 is attached to the first storage gear 641 among the plurality of gears constituting the transmission means. Engage. Therefore, the rotational driving force of the drive motor 420 can be transmitted to the transmission means (a plurality of gears) via the pinion gear 431. As a result, as described later, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 are used. Can be rotated respectively.

  As described above, the first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 and the front gear 646 are a gear group for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. The teeth are formed as spur gears that are engraved on the outer peripheral surface in parallel with the rotation axis. The first to fifth storage gears 641 to 645 are rotatably supported on the back side of the front case body 610, and are connected (engaged) in series so that the first storage gear 641 is the top and the fifth storage is performed. One gear train (gear train) with the gear 645 as the tail is formed.

  The front gear 646 is pivotally supported on the front side of the front case body 610 so as to be able to rotate synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645. That is, the front gear 646 and the fifth storage gear 645 are respectively fixed to one end and the other end of the rotating shaft disposed through the front case body 610, and the gears 645, 646 and the rotating shaft are integrated. Turned and turned.

  According to the gear group configured as described above, when the drive motor 630 is rotationally driven, the rotational driving force is transmitted to the first housing gear 641 via the pinion gear 631, and the first housing gear 641 is rotated. . The rotation of the first housing gear 641 is transmitted to the fifth housing gear 645 by the action of a gear train (gear train), and the front gear 646 is rotated by rotating the fifth housing gear 645.

  Here, as will be described later, the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 (the storing flange portion 653) is provided in the second receiving gear 642, and the second outer periphery of the second rotating body 660 is provided in the front gear 646. Since the gears 661a are engaged with each other, the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be rotated with the rotation of the drive motor 630, respectively. That is, the two rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be simultaneously rotated by the rotational drive of the one drive motor 630.

  In this case, in the present embodiment, an even number of gears (third and fourth housing gears 643 and 644) are interposed between the second housing gear 642 and the fifth housing gear 645. Therefore, not only can the rotation speed between the front gear 646 and the second storage gear 642 rotated synchronously with the fifth storage gear 645 be different, but also the rotation between the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646. You can also change the direction. As a result, as will be described later, the rotation speed and the rotation direction between the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 can be varied.

  In the present embodiment, a gear train including the second storage gear 642 is provided on the back side of the front case body 610, and a front gear is provided on the front side of the front case cheer 610. On the back side, the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a of the first rotating body 650 and the second outer peripheral gear 651a of the second rotating body 660, respectively. Therefore, for example, both the second storage gear 642 and the front gear 646 are arranged on the front side of the front case body 610, and both the gears 642 and 646 are engaged with the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660, respectively. Compared to the structure to be driven, not only the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 but also the structure of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 itself. It can be simplified.

  Further, the gear train and the housing flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 with which the second housing gear 642 of the gear train is engaged are arranged on the back side of the front case body 610, so that the rotation is performed. The gear case and the storage flange portion 653 can be shielded by the front case body 610 from the player who views the operation unit 600 from the front. That is, the shielding structure for shielding the gear train and the storage flange portion 653 in an invisible manner can be simply formed using the back case body 610 without the need to provide another member.

  The first rotator 650 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 (see FIG. 33), and is integrated with the main body 651 and one side in the axial direction of the main body 651. It mainly includes a front effect portion 652 to be formed and a storage flange portion 653 that is fastened and fixed to the other axial side (axial end surface) of the main body 651 with a screw.

  The main body portion 651 is a portion formed in a cylindrical shape from a resin material, and is inserted into the opening 611 in the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612. That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612) with the main body 651 as a rotation axis. Here, a detailed configuration of the main body 651 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 37 (a) is a rear view of the main body 651, and FIG. 37 (b) is a partially enlarged rear view of the main body 651 showing the XXXVII portion of FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. In FIG. 37 (b), for easy understanding, the diameters of the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are schematically enlarged to be larger than actual and the first projecting portion 651a. A virtual circle IS, which is a virtual circle inscribed at each top of the second protrusion 651b, is illustrated using a two-dot chain line.

  As shown in FIGS. 37 (a) and 37 (b), the main body 651 is formed with a first protrusion 651a and a second protrusion 651b, and at a position corresponding to the second protrusion 651b. An offset portion 651c is formed.

  The first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b are formed so as to project from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651, and along the axial direction of the main body portion 651 (FIG. 37 (a) perpendicular to the paper surface). However, it is a part extended over the entire length of the main body part 651 (see FIG. 35), and is a plurality of places (a total of eight places in the present embodiment) that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and the first projecting part 651a and the second projecting part. The portions 651b are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  That is, the first projecting portion 651a embeds a cylindrical body having a circular cross section having a diameter larger than the plate thickness of the main body 561 in the main body 651 in a posture in which the main body 651 and the axial direction coincide with each other. Of the embedded columnar body, the main body portion 651 is formed by a portion protruding from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface (a part of the columnar body). The second protrusion 651b is the same as the first protrusion 651a except that the diameter of the columnar body embedded in the main body 651 is larger than that of the first protrusion 651a.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b projecting from the outer peripheral surface and the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 extend over the entire length of the main body portion 651 along the axial direction. The rigidity of 651 can be increased.

  The second projecting portion 651b is further extended along the axial direction from the axial end surface of the main body portion 651 (the front side surface in FIG. 37 (b)). Therefore, as will be described later, when the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 with a screw, the axially extending portion of the second projecting portion 651b is recessed in the front surface of the storage flange portion 653. The main body 651 and the storage flange 653 can be firmly coupled so as not to be relatively rotatable by being fitted in the recessed portion (see FIG. 36).

  The offset portion 651c is a portion in which the vicinity of the second protruding portion 651b formation portion in the main body portion 651 is offset to the inner peripheral side while maintaining the plate thickness dimension, and is approximately three times the diameter of the second protruding portion 651b. It is formed over a range (circumferential direction). That is, the offset portion 651c is curved in an arc shape concentric with the main body portion 651 in the axial direction view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. By forming the offset portion 651c in the main body portion 651 as described above, the axial center of the second projecting portion 651b can be offset to the axial center side as described later, and the main body portion 651 as a whole can be positioned. Stiffness can be increased.

  The plurality of (four in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651, and the plurality of (four in this embodiment) second protrusions 652b are The amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651 is set to be the same, and the amount of protrusion of the first protrusion 651a is the same due to the offset by the offset portion 651c. The plurality of (eight in this embodiment) first protrusions 651a and second protrusions 652b are set to have the same amount of protrusion from the outer peripheral surface of the main body 651. As a result, as shown in FIG. 37 (b), the virtual circle IS inscribed by the tops of the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion 652b can be set concentrically on the outer peripheral side of the main body 651. In this case, the diameter dimension of the virtual circle IS is set to a dimension equivalent to or slightly larger than the inner diameter dimension of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610.

  Therefore, in a state where the main body 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted into the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612, the contact areas thereof are defined as the first protrusion 651a and the second protrusion. Since it can limit to each top part of 651b, a contact resistance can be suppressed and the main-body part 651 can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical part 612.

  In particular, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b have an arc shape as viewed in the axial direction (specifically, an arc shape in which a cross-sectional shape cut by a plane orthogonal to the axial direction of the main body portion 651 is convex outward). ), The contact area can be suppressed, and the tops of the first and second projecting portions 651a and 651b are smoothly in contact with the opening 611 of the front case body 610 and the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 612. Therefore, the main body 651 can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 even when there is shakiness due to dimensional tolerance.

  As described above, the first projecting portion 651a and the second projecting portion 651b project not only from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 but also from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 651. Thereby, when the main body 651 is molded by the resin mold, the shape of the main body 651 is made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side, and the moldability can be ensured.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the first projecting portion 651a has a projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 651 and the main body portion 651 in the axial view of the main body portion 651 shown in FIG. The projecting dimension of the portion formed by projecting from the inner peripheral surface is the same. Similarly, in the second projecting portion 651a, the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the outer peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c and the projecting dimension of the portion that projects from the inner peripheral surface of the offset portion 651c are the same. . Therefore, the shape on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side of the main body 651 can be made more uniform (symmetrical shape), and the moldability can be further ensured.

  Further, the second protrusion 651b is provided with a circular hole having a circular cross section that is formed along the axial direction thereof (see FIG. 36). Thereby, the thickness of the second protrusion 651b having a larger diameter than that of the first protrusion 651a can be made uniform with other parts (the main body 651, the offset part 651c, the first protrusion 651a, etc.). As a result, the formability of the main body 651 can be ensured.

  In this case, a female screw is engraved on the inner peripheral surface of the hole drilled in the second projecting portion 651b, and a screw for fastening and fixing the storage flange portion 653 can be screwed (see FIG. 36). As described above, the second projecting portion 651b formed with a relatively large diameter serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, thereby ensuring the strength of the screw fastening portion. In particular, the second protruding portion 651b is a portion formed in the offset portion 651c, and the rigidity of the main body portion 651 is reinforced, so that the connecting portion between the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 is connected to the second protruding portion 651b. By carrying it, both can be firmly connected and durability can be improved.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. The front effect part 652 is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part, and is formed so as to protrude radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 651 in a flange shape. The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, and an appearance imitating a glossy metal is imparted to the front effect portion 652. The front effect portion 652 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, but is plated so that the player can visually recognize the light emitting device 680 (light emitting element 681) through the front effect portion 652. Can be avoided.

  The front view portion 652 is formed in a saw blade shape in which a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) having an indefinite shape are repeated along the circumferential direction. Mountains (valleys) are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction (unequal pitches). As will be described later, when the first rotating body 650 is rotated, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 pass through the front side (front side) of the light emitting element 681 of the light emitting device 680 in order, thereby emitting light to the player. The element 681 can be viewed intermittently and selectively (see FIG. 39).

  The storage flange portion 653 is a portion that is stored in the internal space (between the opposing surfaces) of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and the cylindrical portion of the front case body 610 It is fastened and fixed to the end surface in the axial direction of the main body 651 inserted through 612 through the opening 611. Specifically, the storage flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 by screwing the screw inserted through the storage flange portion 653 into the second projecting portion 651b of the main body portion 651 as described above.

  The storage flange portion 653 is set to have a thickness dimension that is equal to or slightly smaller than the distance between the opposing surfaces of the front case body 610 and the back case body 620, and has an outer diameter dimension that corresponds to the front case body 610 and the back case. The size is set to be larger than the inner diameter of the openings 611 and 621 in the body 620. Accordingly, the first rotating body 650 defines the axial position of the first rotating body 650 by bringing the front or back surface of the storage flange portion 653 into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 or the front surface of the back case body 620. it can.

  A first outer peripheral gear 653a is engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653. The first outer peripheral gear 653a has a second storage in the above-described gear train disposed on the back surface of the front case body 610. The gear 642 is meshed. Therefore, when the gear train is rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the storage flange portion 653 via the second storage gear 642 and the first outer peripheral gear 653a, and the first rotating body 650 is moved. It is rotated.

  As described above, the first rotating body 650 has the first outer peripheral gear 653a engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the storage flange portion 653, and the first rotating body 650 includes a gear train disposed along the periphery of the opening 511 of the front case body 610. Since the second storage gear 642 is engaged with the first outer peripheral gear 653a, the transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the first rotating body 650 can be simplified. In particular, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and a projected surface portion 671 of a spherical liquid crystal device 670 described later is disposed on the inner peripheral side thereof, so it is difficult to secure a space on the inner peripheral surface side. It becomes. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the first rotating body 650.

  Further, as described above, the first rotating body 650 (main body portion 651) is rotatably supported on the inner peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610. Therefore, the first rotating body 650 is disposed. The position can be defined with reference to the front case body 610. Therefore, a position between the gear (first outer gear 653a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body 650 (housing flange portion 653) and the second housing gear 642 disposed in the front case body 610. The relationship can be defined with the front case body 610 as a reference. As a result, the meshing state of the first outer peripheral gear 653a and the second housing gear 642 of the first rotating body 650 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gear can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed. it can.

  The second rotator 660 is an effect member for performing effects by rotating on the back side of the first rotator 650 (see FIG. 33), and is a main body formed in a cylindrical shape from a light-transmitting resin material. 661 and a front effect portion 662 formed integrally with the axial end surface of the main body portion 661.

  The main body portion 661 is set to have an inner diameter dimension that is equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter dimension of the cylindrical portion 612 in the front case body 610 and is fitted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 (that is, The cylindrical case 612 is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the main body 661) and is rotatably held by the front case body 610 (cylindrical portion 612).

  A second outer peripheral gear 661a is formed on the outer peripheral surface of the main body 661, and the above-described front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 is meshed with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. Therefore, when the gear train and the front gear 646 described above are rotated by the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630, the rotation is transmitted to the main body 661 via the front gear 646 and the second outer peripheral gear 661a, and the second rotation. The body 660 is rotated.

  Thus, the second rotating body 660 has the second outer peripheral gear 661a engraved on the outer peripheral surface thereof, and the front gear 646 disposed on the front surface of the front case body 610 meshes with the second outer peripheral gear 661a. The transmission structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the drive motor 630 to the second rotating body 660 can be simplified. In particular, since the second rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is rotatably held by being fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, a space is secured on the inner peripheral surface side. Difficult to do. Therefore, it is effective that the transmission structure described above can be disposed on the outer peripheral side of the second rotating body 660.

  Further, as described above, since the second rotating body 660 is rotatably supported on the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 611 of the front case body 610, the arrangement position of the second rotating body 660 is set to the front case body. 610 can be defined as a standard. Therefore, the positional relationship between the gear (second outer peripheral gear 661 a) engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 disposed in the front case body 610 is expressed as the front case body 610. Can be defined as a standard. As a result, the meshing state of the second outer peripheral gear 661a of the second rotating body 660 and the front gear 646 can be stabilized, so that uneven wear of the gears can be suppressed and driving resistance can be suppressed.

  The main body portion 661 has an axial dimension that is set to a size that is equal to or slightly smaller than the facing distance between the front surface of the front case body 610 and the back surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 causes the end face on one side in the axial direction or the end face on the other side in the axial direction of the main body 661 to abut on the back of the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 or the front of the front case body 610. Thus, the axial position of the second rotating body 650 can be defined.

  The main body 661 has a front ridge 661b and a back ridge 661c projecting from the end surface on one side in the axial direction and the end surface on the other side in the axial direction. The front ridge 661b is formed in an annular shape in front view, and the back ridge 661c is formed in a shape obtained by dividing the annular shape in front view at a plurality of locations. Thereby, when rotating the 1st rotary body 660, the frictional resistance between the main-body part 661, the front case 610, and the 2nd rotary body 650 (front effect part 652) is reduced, and the load of the drive motor 630 is reduced. Can be suppressed.

  The front effect part 662 is located on the back side of the front effect part 652 in the first rotating body 650 and is a part that is visually recognized by the player as an effect part together with the effect part 652, and is radial from the outer peripheral surface of the main body part 661. It is formed to project outward in a flange shape. The front effect portion 662 has an outer peripheral side portion 662a formed in a saw blade shape in which irregularly shaped peaks and valleys are repeated along the circumferential direction, and an annular shape in front view on the inner peripheral side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. And an inner peripheral side portion 662b which is a portion.

  The front surface (front surface, appearance forming surface) of the front effect portion 662 is plated in the same manner as the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. However, in the first rotating body 650 described above, the entire surface (entire range) of the front effect portion 652 is plated, but in the second rotating body 650, only the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 is plated. The inner peripheral portion 662b is not plated.

  Therefore, as will be described later, a mountain (second portion) and a valley (first portion) of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650 are sequentially passed on the front side (front) of the light emitting element 681 in the light emitting device 680. Thus, when the light-emitting element 681 is viewed intermittently and selectively by the player, the light-emitting element 681 is watermarked on the inner peripheral side portion 662b (that is, the portion not plated) of the front effect portion 662. Thus, it is possible to make the player visually recognize (see FIG. 39).

  The spherical liquid crystal device 670 includes a projection surface portion 671 formed as a spherical shell from a light transmissive material, and a case body 672 in which a projection device that projects an image on the inner surface of the spherical shell of the projection surface portion 671 is housed. The video image projected from the projection device and transmitted through the outer surface of the projection surface portion 671 is visually recognized by the player. In the assembled state, the case body 672 is fastened and fixed to the back surface of the back case body 620, and the projected surface portion 671 causes approximately half of the spherical shell to protrude forward from the front surface of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. In this posture, it is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body 650 (see FIG. 33).

  The light-emitting device 680 includes a case body 681 having an annular shape in front view that is fitted around the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case 610, a circuit board accommodated in the case body 681, and a front surface (front surface) of the circuit board. A plurality of (twelve in the present embodiment) light emitting elements 682 disposed (mounted) on the side, and in the assembled state, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660. It is disposed on the back side of 662.

  On the front surface (front surface) of the case body 681, openings having an outer shape larger than that of the light emitting element 682 are formed at 12 positions that are equally spaced in the circumferential direction, and each light emitting element corresponds to the opening position of each opening. 682 is mounted on the circuit board. That is, in the front view, the light emitting device 680 has the light emitting element 682 exposed from the opening of the case body 681, and transmits light emitted from the light emitting element 682 through the opening of the case body 681 (first rotation). It is possible to irradiate the front direction portions 652 and 662) of the body 650 and the second rotating body 660.

  As described above, the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are disposed on the front (front) side of the light emitting device 680, and the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 is provided. Is rotated, it is possible to make the player visually recognize light emitted by the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively. Here, a structure for allowing a player to visually recognize light emitted from the light emitting element 682 intermittently and selectively will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG.

  FIG. 38 is a front view of the rotary operation unit 600, and FIGS. 38A and 38B show a state in which the first rotary bodies 650 are arranged at different rotational positions. 39A is a cross-sectional view of the rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXa-XXXIXa in FIG. 38A, and FIG. 39B is a rotation operation unit 600 taken along the line XXXIXb-XXXIXb in FIG. FIG.

  38, in order to clarify the phase relationship between the front rendering unit 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680, the first rotating body 650 and the rotating operation unit 600 Only the light emitting device 680 is illustrated, and in FIG. 39, in order to clarify the radial position relationship between the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. FIG. 38 schematically illustrates a disassembled state in which the second rotating body 660 is added to the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting device 680 illustrated in FIG. 38.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the front view shape of the front effect portion 652 in the first rotator 650 is an irregularly shaped mountain (second portion) and valley (first portion) that are repeated along the circumferential direction. In the light emitting device 680, the light emitting element 682 is disposed at a radially outer side (upper side in FIG. 39 (a)) than the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652, and in the front effect portion 652. It is set at a radial position (FIG. 39 (a) vertical position) that is radially inward (downward in FIG. 39 (a)) from the summit.

  In this case, as described above, the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is not plated on the front surface (front surface) and is formed so as to transmit light. The formation range of the peripheral portion 662b (the range indicated by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 39) is set to a range including the valley bottom in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 and the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680. That is, in front view, light is emitted from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 via the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 (that is, transmitted). The player can visually recognize the light emitting element 682 of the device 680.

  In addition, as described above, the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated on the front surface (front surface) to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal. The outer peripheral side portion 662a is disposed to face the back side of the front rendering portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. That is, in the front view, the player can visually recognize the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotator 660 from the valley portion of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  As described above, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 is formed with alternately crests and valleys in the circumferential direction in the region overlapping the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 when viewed from the front. Therefore, as the first rotating body 650 rotates, the peaks and valleys of the front effect portion 652 alternately pass in front of the light emitting element 682, so that the light emitting element 682 emits light and the second rotating body 660. The player can make the player intermittently view through the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front effect portion 682. Accordingly, it is possible to effectively perform an effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) around the spherical liquid crystal device 670 as a center.

  Further, the outer peripheral side portion 662a in the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 is plated to give an appearance imitating a glossy metal, and the front (front side) side of the outer peripheral side portion 662a. Is provided with a front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650. Therefore, as described above, when the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 are rotated in opposite directions, the first rotary body 650 has a valley portion in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotary body 650. The player can visually recognize the aspect in which the outer peripheral side portion 662a of the front effect portion 652 of the two-rotor 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650.

  That is, according to the rotational operation unit 600, the player who views the first rotating body 650 from the front side intermittently visually recognizes the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 on the valley bottom side in the mountain valley shape of the front rendering unit 652. On the summit side in the mountain valley shape of the front effect portion 652, the front effect portion 662 (outer peripheral portion 662a) of the second rotating body 660 is rotated in the opposite direction to the front effect portion 652 (mountain valley shape) of the first rotating body 650. Can be visually recognized. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotating body 650 and the rotation of the second rotating body 660 can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them. As a result, a plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660). It is possible to effectively perform the effects of rotating each of them.

  Further, according to the rotation effect unit 600, as described above, valleys in the front effect portion 652 of the first rotating body 650 are formed in 16 places in the circumferential direction, while the light emitting elements 682 of the light emitting device 680 are in the circumferential direction 12. Since the light emitting elements 682 are disposed at the twelve places, the player can selectively make only a specific light emitting element 682 visible.

  That is, the circumferential spacing of the valleys in the front effect portion 652 is different from the circumferential spacing of the light emitting elements 682. For example, in the state shown in FIG. While the provided light emitting element 682 is visible, when the first rotating body 650 (front effect unit 652) is rotated by a predetermined rotation angle from the state shown in FIG. 38A, FIG. ), Different light emitting elements 682 are selected, and the light emitting elements 682 arranged at the four locations in the upper right, lower right, lower left and upper left are made visible.

  Thereby, not only can the light emitting element 682 of the light emitting device 680 be visually recognized intermittently, but also the position of the visually recognized light emitting element 682 can be changed in the circumferential direction, so that a plurality of rotating bodies (first rotating body 650 and The effect of rotating the second rotating body 660) can be more effectively performed.

  Returning to FIG. 34 to FIG. 36, the overall structure of the rotary operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 are formed in the front case body 610, and the storage flange portion 653 is formed separately from the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 in the first rotating body 650. Therefore, the second rotating body 660 is mounted on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610, and the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 is inserted on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. At the same time, after the housing flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the inserted main body portion 651, the back case body 620 is fastened and fixed to the front case body 610, whereby the first rotating body 650 is attached to the front case body 610 and the back case body 620. The second rotating body 660 can be held in a rotatable state.

  That is, the first rotating body 650 is rotatably supported by the front case body 610 by inserting the main body 651 through the opening 611 and the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the storage flange portion 653 of the first rotating body 650 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the front case body 610 and the front surface of the back case body 620, whereby the first rotating body 650 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 is obtained. Displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) can be regulated.

  At the same time, the second rotating body 660 is pivotally supported by the front case body 610 by being externally fitted to the cylindrical portion 612 of the front case body 610. In this case, the second rotator 660 (the front ridge 661b and the back ridge 662c) is brought into contact with the back of the front effect portion 652 of the first rotator 650 and the front of the case body 681 of the light emitting device 680, respectively. Thereby, the displacement to the front side (front) and back side (rear) of the 2nd rotary body 660 with respect to both case bodies 610 and 620 can be controlled.

  Thus, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) can be held in a rotatable state, and the rotating body (the first rotating body 650) itself. Since this also serves as a part that regulates the displacement of the second rotating body 660, the structure can be simplified correspondingly. In addition, the holding flange portion 653 is fastened and fixed to the main body portion 651 of the first rotating body 650 with a holding structure that can hold the plurality of rotating bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) in a rotatable state. Since it can form only by doing, an assembly process can be simplified. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

  Further, according to the rotation operation unit 600, the first rotating body 650 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the opening 621 is formed in the back case body 620. Therefore, the front case body 610 and the back case body 620 are rotated a plurality of times. After the bodies (the first rotating body 650 and the second rotating body 660) are held in a rotatable state, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 is mounted from the back side of the back case body 620 and fastened and fixed. The assembly of the unit 600 can be completed (see FIG. 33). That is, the spherical liquid crystal device 670 can be retrofitted in a separate process with respect to the assembly of the case bodies 5610 and 620 and the rotary bodies 650 and 660. Therefore, this point can also contribute to simplifying the assembly process and reducing the product cost.

  The present invention has been described based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications can be easily made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. It can be guessed.

  In the protrusion operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, the case where the relative displacement member 450 is disposed so as to be slidable with respect to the base side displacement member 440 has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. The relative displacement member 450 may be rotatably arranged with respect to 440. That is, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the first operation is to rotate the base side displacement member 440 between the retracted position (see FIG. 13) and the rotation position (see FIG. 14), and the second operation is A configuration in which the relative displacement member 450 is rotated with respect to the base-side displacement member 440 between a reference position (see FIG. 14) and an extended position (see FIG. 15) may be employed.

  Even with this configuration, the base side displacement member 450 in the retracted position is disposed at the rotation position by the first operation, and the relative displacement member 450 at the reference position is disposed at the extended position by the second operation. While both the displacement members 440 and 450 can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player and the effect of the performance can be sufficiently exhibited, the relative displacement member 450 in the extended position is rotated to the reference position by the second operation. Since the base side displacement member 440 in the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, both the displacement members 440 and 450 are reduced in size, and the space required to accommodate the displacement member is suppressed. it can.

  In the protruding operation unit 400 in the above embodiment, in the state where the base side displacement member 440 is disposed at the retracted position (see FIG. 17B), the front end side of the base side displacement member 450 is more than the front end side of the relative displacement member 450. Although the case of projecting to the decorative member 480 side (the upper side in FIG. 17B) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and conversely, the distal end side of the relative displacement member 450 is the base displacement member 450. You may employ | adopt the structure protruded to the decoration member 480 side (FIG.17 (b) upper side) rather than the front end side.

  Also with this configuration, the rotational trajectories of both displacement members 440 and 450 can intersect with the decoration member 480, and at the time of the intersection, the decoration member 480 can be transmitted and the both displacement members 440 and 450 can be visually recognized. The production effect by displacing the members 440 and 450 can be enhanced. Furthermore, according to this configuration, when the relative displacement member 450 is extended (see FIG. 15), the area of the decorative portion 454 located in the front (front) can be further increased, and the force can be further increased. Improvements can be made.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the driven member 550 (connection shaft 561b) can be rotated by forming the connection groove 552a of the driven member 550 in a long hole shape. In addition, the case of being connected in a slidable state has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and a driven member for the driven member 550 (connection groove 552a) is formed by forming the connection groove 552a in a circular shape. A configuration in which the slide displacement of 560 (connection shaft 561b) is disabled (that is, a configuration in which only rotation is allowed) may be employed. Even in this configuration, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed. It is possible to enhance the production effect by adding a change to.

  In this case, the displacement defining means constituted by the first guide groove 513 and the first pin 561a is engaged with the gear disposed on the driven member 560 concentrically with the connection shaft 561b and the gear. You may comprise by the curved rack gear formed along the circular arc centering on the drive shaft 551a of the to-be-driven member 550, and arrange | positioned at the front case body 510 or the back case body 520. Accordingly, when the driven member 560 is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, the relative angle of the driven member 560 with respect to the driven member 550 can be changed by the gear rolling the rack gear. it can.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are formed in the front case body 510 and the back case body 520, and are inserted through the both guide grooves 513 and 523, respectively. Although the case where the 1 pin 561a and the connecting shaft 561b are formed on the driven member 560 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and conversely, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are connected to the driven member. 560 and a configuration in which a portion (a member corresponding to the first pin 561a and the connection shaft 561b) inserted into both the guide grooves 513 and 523 is provided in the front case body 510 and / or the back case body 520 is employed. May be. This configuration also allows the driven member 560 to perform a combination of linear motion and rotational motion in accordance with the displacement of the driven member 550, so that the trajectory of the driven member 560 is changed, The production effect can be enhanced.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the case where the first guide groove 513 is drilled (opened) in the front case body 510 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto, and the first guide groove 513 is not necessarily limited thereto. However, it may be formed as a concave groove having a U-shaped cross section, for example. That is, the first guide groove 513 has only a shape that can guide the first pin 561a along the extending direction.

  In the combined operation unit 500 in the above embodiment, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are curved and extended, while the connection groove 551a is linearly extended. On the contrary, the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523 are linearly extended while the connection groove 551a is curved and extended. Also good. In particular, for the first guide groove 513 and the second guide groove 523, the case where the radius of curvature is set to a constant arc shape has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the arc shapes of a plurality of curvature radii are combined. It is naturally possible to adopt a different shape (for example, an S shape). As a result, the trajectory of the driven member 560 can be changed in a more complicated manner, so that the production effect can be enhanced.

  Specifically, for example, when the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to an arc shape, the arc shape is defined as the rotation start end of the rotation direction of the driven member 550 about the shaft portions 553 and 554. Or in the state arrange | positioned in the terminal end and its vicinity, it is preferable to make a radius larger than a reference value (a curvature is made small). That is, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 in the first range in the vicinity and the first range or the end in the vicinity thereof and the second range in the vicinity thereof is made larger than the reference value, or the first range and the second range. It is preferable to make it larger than the radius in the third range located between the ranges. As a result, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member 550 in the stopped state by the driving motor 530, the load can be reduced and the driving can be started smoothly.

  Alternatively, while the driven member 560 is invisible by the front case body 510, the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value, and a part of the driven member 560 is set. Until the entirety of the driven member 560 is exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible) from the beginning of being exposed outside the area of the front case body 510 (becomes visible). The radius of the guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in the former case, since the operation of the driven member 560 is not visually recognized by the player, it is possible to reduce the load of the drive motor 530 without affecting the effect, and in the latter case, Since the movement of the driven member 560 can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member 560 is shielded, the effect that the driven member 560 appears suddenly from the front case body 510 or the driven member 560 is the front case body 510. It is possible to perform an effect that hides quickly on the back of the camera.

  Alternatively, the driven member 560 is decorated within a range defined by a pair of virtual lines inclined up and down by 45 degrees with respect to a horizontal line passing through the connection shaft 561b in a horizontal posture (viewed in the direction of the connection shaft 561b (see FIG. 30)). While the radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 is set to a value larger than the reference value while the driven member 560 exceeds the horizontal posture, The radius of the first guide groove 513 or the second guide groove 523 may be set to a value smaller than the reference value. According to this, in a region where the weight of the driven member 560 (gravity action) needs to be supported by the driving force of the driving motor 530 is relatively large, the radius is increased, and the n-type friction resistance and the driven in each guide groove 513,514. An area where the influence of the inertia force due to the posture change of the member 560 can be reduced and the load of the drive motor 530 can be reduced, while the weight of the driven member 560 (the action of gravity) needs to be supported by the drive force of the drive motor 530 is relatively small Then, by reducing the radius, it is possible to increase the change in the operation of the driven member 560 and enhance the effect.

  In the rotational operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the main body portion 651 and the front effect portion 652 are integrated in the first rotating body 650 and the storage flange portion 653 is separate is described. Instead, the main body portion 651 and the storage flange portion 653 may be integrated, and the front effect portion 652 may be a separate body so that the first rotating body 650 is formed. Also with this configuration, as in the case of the above-described embodiment, the structure and assembly process for rotatably holding a plurality of rotating bodies can be simplified, and the product cost can be reduced.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case where the inner peripheral side portion 662b of the front rendering unit 662 of the second rotator 660 is formed with the front surface (front surface) as a flat surface has been described. Instead, a part or all of the front surface may be replaced with a flat surface to have another shape. Examples of other shapes include a surface having a plurality of irregularities, a surface formed in a corrugated cross section, an inclined surface, a curved surface, or a surface combining these. When these other shapes are adopted, not only can the light emitted from the light emitting element 682 and transmitted through the inner peripheral side portion 662b be irregularly reflected or refracted, the diffused reflection or Since the movement in the direction of refraction can be given, the effect of the production can be enhanced (see FIG. 39).

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the case has been described in which the outer diameter size of the front rendering portion 662 of the second rotator 660 is set to a size that overlaps only a part of the front gear 646 in front view ( However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the outer diameter dimension of the front effect portion 662 of the second rotating body 660 may be set to a size that overlaps the entire front gear 646 when viewed from the front. Thereby, since the front gear 646 can be shielded by the front effect part 662, it is not necessary to separately provide a member for making the front gear 646 invisible to the player. Note that if the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player, the front gear 646 can be a larger-diameter gear, so that the degree of freedom in setting the gear ratio can be increased. Therefore, the change in rotation of the second rotator 660 relative to the first rotator 650 can be increased.

  In the rotation operation unit 600 in the above embodiment, the description of the stop positions of the first rotator 650 and the second rotator 660 is omitted, but it may be configured as follows. That is, the mountain shape of at least one or both of the front effect portions 652 and 662 of the first rotator 650 or the second rotator 660 is formed to a size that can shield the front gear 646 when viewed from the front. You may make it stop rotation of the 1st rotary body 650 or the 2nd rotary body 660 in the phase position where a shape part is arrange | positioned in front of the front gear 646. FIG. Thereby, the front gear 646 can be made invisible to the player when the rotation of the first rotating body 650 or the second rotating body 660 is stopped.

  You may implement this invention in the pachinko machine etc. of a different type from said each embodiment. For example, once a big hit, a pachinko machine that raises the expected value of the big hit until a big hit state occurs (for example, two times or three times) including that (for example, a two-time right item, a three-time right item) May also be implemented. Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, the present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine that has a special area such as a V zone and has a special gaming state as a necessary condition that a special ball is awarded to the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, the game machine may be implemented as various game machines such as an alepatchi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a game machine in which a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine are integrated.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating a control lever in a state where a symbol effective line is determined by inserting coins, and a symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating a stop button. Is. Accordingly, the basic concept of the slot machine is that it is provided with a display device for confirming and displaying the identification information after variably displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and resulting from the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variation display of the identification information is started, and the variation display of the identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific condition. In this case, the game medium is typically a coin, medal, etc. Take as an example.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided that displays a symbol after a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols is variably displayed, and has a handle for launching a ball. What is not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of spheres based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the change of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or With the passage of time, the variation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player is generated on the condition that the determined symbol at the time of stoppage is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large amount of balls are paid out to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

The concept of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention is shown below.
<About the concept of the invention taking the protruding operation unit 400 as an example>
In a gaming machine including a driving unit that generates a driving force and a displacement member that is displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, the displacement member is formed to be rotatable between a retracted position and a rotating position. A base-side displacement member that is disposed on the base-side displacement member and is formed so as to be displaceable between a reference position and an overhanging position protruding outward from the base-side displacement member with respect to the reference position A displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the proximal displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position, and the relative displacement member with respect to the proximal displacement member at the reference position and the extended position. A game machine A1 that is capable of executing a second action that is displaced between each other.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by rotating a displacement member around a base end side rotatably supported (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-92634). For example, see paragraphs 0175-0189, FIG. 83)). According to this gaming machine, by rotating the displacement member in one direction, the distal end side of the displacement member is disposed at a predetermined position which is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, while the displacement member is in a direction opposite to the one direction. By rotating in the other direction, the displacement member is retracted out of the display area (retreat position) of the liquid crystal display device. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, if the outer shape of the displacement member is small, it is difficult to make the displacement member fully visible to the player at a predetermined position on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, and the effect of presentation is sufficiently exerted. On the other hand, if the outer shape of the displacement member is large, there is a problem that a large space is required outside the display area (retracted position). The gaming machine A1 is made to solve the above-described problems, and allows the player to sufficiently recognize the displacement member at a predetermined position while suppressing the space required for the retracted position. An object is to provide a gaming machine.

  That is, according to the gaming machine A1, the displacement member is disposed on the base side displacement member that is formed to be rotatable between the retracted position and the rotation position, and the reference position and the reference position are disposed on the base side displacement member. A relative displacement member formed so as to be displaceable between the projecting positions projecting outward from the base side displacement member, and a first operation for rotating the base side displacement member between the retracted position and the rotational position; Since the second operation of displacing the relative displacement member relative to the base displacement member between the reference position and the extended position can be executed, the base displacement member at the retracted position is rotated by the first operation. When disposing at the position, the relative displacement member at the reference position is disposed at the projecting position by the second operation, so that the relative displacement member can be projected outward from the base side displacement member. Therefore, since the displacement member can be enlarged as a whole, the displacement member can be sufficiently visually recognized by the player at the rotational position, and the effect of the effect can be sufficiently exhibited.

  On the other hand, when the base side displacement member at the rotation position is arranged at the retracted position by the first operation, the relative displacement member by the extended position is arranged at the reference position by the second operation, whereby the base of the relative displacement member is arranged. The outward protrusion from the side displacement member can be suppressed. Therefore, since the displacement member can be reduced as a whole, the space required to accommodate the displacement member at the retracted position can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to secure a space for disposing other parts and devices.

  The second operation may be performed at least until the second operation is arranged at the retracted position (that is, until the first operation is completed). Therefore, at least a part of the first operation and at least a part of the second operation may be executed in an overlapping manner.

  The gaming machine A1 includes a front member that is disposed in front of a moving plane of the displacement member and that has an opening, and the relative displacement when the base-side displacement member 440 is disposed at the rotational position by the first operation. When at least a part of the member is visible to the player through the opening of the front member, and the relative displacement member is disposed at the extended position by the second operation, the front member of the relative displacement member A gaming machine A2 characterized in that an area visible to the player through the opening is enlarged.

  According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine A1, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position is first caused to appear in the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and the relative displacement is achieved. Making the player visually recognize only a part of the member, and then performing an effect of enlarging the region in which the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member through the opening of the front member by a linear motion (second motion). Can do.

  In the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed by moving the relative displacement member relative to the base side displacement member with the reference position and the overhang. A gaming machine A3 that is slid and displaced between positions.

  According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A2, the relative displacement member is slidably disposed on the base side displacement member, and the second operation is performed with respect to the base side displacement member. Since the slide displacement is performed between the reference position and the overhang position, for example, the relative movement member is stretched from the reference position as compared with a case where the second operation is a mode in which the relative displacement member is rotated with respect to the base displacement member. A space necessary for displacing to the extended position can be suppressed, and accordingly, a space for disposing other parts and devices can be secured. In addition, since the displacement mode of the relative displacement member by the second motion can be made different from the displacement mode of the base displacement member by the first motion, the effect of performing the first motion and the second motion Can be increased.

  In the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is disposed in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is a direction along the longitudinal direction. A gaming machine A4 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the relative displacement member is arranged in a posture along the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member, and the direction of the slide displacement is mutually mutual. Since it is set as the direction along the longitudinal direction, the displacement member can be expanded and contracted as a whole by the slide displacement along the longitudinal direction of the relative displacement member with respect to the base side displacement member. Therefore, in the rotation position, the displacement member is enlarged as a whole by extension, so that the player can be made fully visible, and the effect can be sufficiently exhibited. On the other hand, at the retracted position, the displacement member can be made smaller as a whole by shortening, so that the space required to accommodate the displacement member can be suppressed, and a space for arranging other parts and devices is secured. can do.

  In addition, according to the gaming machine A4, the relative displacement member that has been retracted to the retracted position first appears from the side of the opening of the front member by a rotational motion (first operation), and a part of the relative displacement member Only the player can visually recognize only, and then the linear movement (second operation) is extended toward the opening of the front member to enlarge the area where the player can visually recognize the relative displacement member. be able to. Therefore, the visual recognition area of the relative displacement member can be enlarged by a motion form (linear motion) different from the motion form at the time of appearance (rotational motion), and the visual recognition area is expanded by the unexpectedness due to the change of the motion form and the linear motion. It is possible to make the player feel a sense of speed by being played and a sense of unity of the combined action by being performed continuously while being combined. As a result, it is possible to obtain an effect that cannot be achieved with a configuration in which the relative displacement member simply protrudes and retracts with respect to the opening of the front member only by linear motion (a configuration in which the retracted position and the extended position are reciprocated).

  The gaming machine A4 includes a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member, and the transmission unit is disposed at a position overlapping the displacement member disposed at the retracted position in a front view. A gaming machine A5 characterized by this.

  According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the gaming machine A5 includes transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the driving means to the displacement member, and the transmission means is in front view with the displacement member disposed at the retracted position. Since it is disposed at the overlapping position, the dead space formed on the back side of the displacement member disposed at the retracted position can be effectively utilized as the space for disposing the transmission means.

  The gaming machine A5 includes a holding member that holds the driving unit, the transmission unit, and the displacement member, and the driving unit and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member, and the displacement member has a longitudinal direction thereof. A gaming machine A6, wherein the driving means is disposed in the retracted position in a posture in which the driving means is positioned on an extension line of the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, the driving means and the displacement member are disposed on one surface side of the holding member. For example, the driving device is driven on one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member. Compared with the case where the means and the displacement member are respectively disposed, the size in the direction connecting the one surface side and the other surface side of the holding member can be reduced. Furthermore, since the displacement member is disposed at the retracted position in a posture in which the drive unit is positioned on the extension line in the longitudinal direction, the displacement member and the drive unit can be disposed linearly. Therefore, the space required as the retreat position can be efficiently suppressed.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the game machine includes: a transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the driving unit to the displacement member; and a holding member that holds the transmission unit. The transmission member drives the driving unit. A rotating member that is rotated by receiving a force, and a predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position is pivotally supported at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one side position is rotated by the holding member. A link member pivotally supported so that the other side position is connected to a relative displacement member of the displacement member, and when the rotation member is rotated between a first rotation position and an intermediate rotation position, As the link member is displaced, the base side displacement member is rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member, whereby the first operation is performed, and the rotation member is moved between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position. If the rotation is Gaming machine A7, wherein a relative displacement member of the displacement member in association with the displacement of the click member is displaced relative to the base-side displacement member, the second operation is performed.

  According to the gaming machine A7, the link member pivotally supports a predetermined position between the one-side position and the other-side position at a position eccentric from the rotation center of the rotating member, and the one-side position is pivoted to the holding member. Since the other side position is connected to the relative displacement member of the displacement member, the rotation member is rotated by the driving force of the drive means, so that the rotation of the rotation member is changed to the relative displacement member of the displacement member via the link member. Can communicate. In this case, when the rotation member is rotated between the first rotation position and the intermediate rotation position, the base side displacement member can be rotated via the relative displacement member of the displacement member in accordance with the displacement of the link member. Can perform actions. On the other hand, when the rotation member is rotated between the intermediate rotation position and the second rotation position, the relative displacement member of the displacement member can be displaced relative to the base side displacement member with the displacement of the link member, and the second operation Can be executed. That is, according to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, two different operations of the first operation and the second operation can be performed by one driving means, so that the component cost can be reduced. This can reduce the product cost accordingly.

  In addition, the transmission means may have a structure in which a gear is provided at one side position of the link member, and a gear provided on the outer periphery of the rotation member is meshed with the gear to displace the link member. Space required for arrangement of members and link members increases. On the other hand, in the gaming machine A6, since the predetermined position between the one side position and the other side position of the link member is pivotally supported by the rotating member, the rotating member and the link member can be arranged in an overlapping state in a front view, The space required for disposing the rotating member and the link member can be suppressed by the overlap.

  Furthermore, since the relative displacement member and the holding member are connected via the transmission member, the swing of the relative displacement member can be suppressed using the rigidity of the holding member.

  In any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the displacement trajectory of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in front view. A gaming machine A8 comprising a decorative member.

  According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, when the base side displacement member of the displacement member is rotated by the first operation, at least the displacement member and the decorative member are arranged in front view. It can be crossed in part, and the production effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine A8, the displacement member is configured such that one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member is a rotation center in the first operation, and the relative displacement member is in the longitudinal direction on the front side of the base side displacement member. The second operation is configured such that the relative displacement member is slid between the reference position and the extended position with respect to the base displacement member, and the decorative member is The displacement movement at the rotation tip side of the displacement member when the proximal displacement member is rotated by the first operation is disposed at a position where at least a part thereof overlaps in the front view, and the first operation causes the base displacement member to rotate. When the side displacement member is arranged at the rotational position, the overlap with the displacement member in front view is not formed, and the relative displacement member has the rotation center side on the front side rather than the rotation tip side. Gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is location shape.

  According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A8, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member has a shape in which the rotation center side is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side, that is, Since the rotation tip side is shaped to be located behind the back side, the contact between the relative displacement member and the decorative member can be suppressed when the base side displacement member is rotated by the first operation. In this case, since the displacement member has one side in the longitudinal direction of the base side displacement member as the rotation center in the first operation, the rotation tip side that is the free end is likely to swing back and forth during the first operation, and is in contact with the decorative member. Is likely to occur. Therefore, the configuration of the gaming machine A9 is particularly effective.

  On the other hand, when the relative displacement member is slid from the reference position to the overhang position by the second operation, the relative displacement member disposed on the front side of the base side displacement member is located on the front side of the rotation center side of the rotation tip side. By adopting the shape located on the side, the relative displacement member can be disposed more forward (side closer to the player) and the force can be increased accordingly.

  In the gaming machine A9, the shape in which the rotation center side of the relative displacement member is located on the front side rather than the rotation tip side of the relative displacement member is an arbitrary shape from the rotation tip side to the rotation center side. It may be changed stepwise, or may be changed gradually in a straight line or curved line.

  In any one of the gaming machines A6 to A9, a pin member provided on one of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member and a pin member provided on the other side of the base side displacement member or the relative displacement member can be slidably displaced. A slide groove that receives and allows the relative displacement member to slide relative to the proximal displacement member, and the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is relative to the pin member relative to the pin member. A gaming machine A10 that is on the distal side in the sliding direction of the displacement member.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A6 to A9, the position where the other side position of the link member is connected to the relative displacement member is the front end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member rather than the pin member. Therefore, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be brought closer to the distal end side in the sliding direction of the relative displacement member. In other words, the location where the relative displacement member is supported by the holding member via the link member can be moved away from the location where the proximal displacement member is pivotally supported by the holding member. As a result, it is possible to easily suppress the relative displacement member from shaking in the front-rear direction.
<About the concept of the invention taking the complex operation unit 500 as an example>
In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner. A driven member connected to the driven member in a displaceable manner; and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means allows the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. By being defined, the driven member is displaced relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means.

  Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the liquid crystal display from the projecting position and the projecting position of the liquid crystal display device, for example, by the driving force from the driving means. There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retracted position retracted in a direction outside the display area of the apparatus (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-200990 (for example, paragraph 0095, FIG. 11 to FIG. 15)). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent. However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement. The gaming machine B1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can change the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. To do.

  That is, according to the gaming machine B1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, the displacement defining means defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member, so that the displacement of the driven member is determined. Accordingly, the driven member can be driven while being relatively displaced with respect to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a linear or arc-shaped fixed track, for example, the driven member can be displaced along a track different from the driven member. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced along the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.

  In the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the first groove. And a first guided portion formed on the gaming machine B2.

  According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the first guided portion is guided along the first groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (first groove part) and the part guided by the part (first guided part), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B1 or B2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state.

  According to the gaming machine B3, in the gaming machine B1 or B2, since the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state, when the driven member is relatively displaced along with the displacement of the driven member, The relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong change in impression as a change in the displacement mode.

  In the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state.

  According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine B3, the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state, so that the driven member is relatively moved along with the displacement of the driven member. When displacing, not only can the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member be changed by rotation, but also the relative position of both can be changed by slide displacement. The variation of change that can be given can be increased.

  In the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the other of the driven member or the holding member guided along the second groove portion. And a second guided portion formed on the gaming machine B5.

  According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B4, the displacement defining means includes the second groove portion and the second guided portion, and the second guided portion is guided along the second groove portion. The displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the contour (shape) of the second groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the second groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. In particular, when the driven member is connected to the driven member so as to be rotatable and slidable, the guide structure is a combination of the first groove portion and the first guided portion, and the combination of the second groove portion and the second guided portion. By providing both with the guide structure, not only can the variation of the change that can be given to the mode of displacement be increased, but even when the displaceable direction of the driven member relative to the driven member is multidirectional, the displacement can be reduced to two. Since it can guide with a guide structure, it can control that displacement becomes unstable and can aim at improvement in reliability as a movable member.

  In the gaming machine B5, as in the case described above, the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (second groove part) and the part guided by the part (second guided part). As a result, the product cost can be reduced and the reliability and durability of the movable member can be improved.

  In the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the driven member is configured such that the second guided portion is rotatable and slide-displaced. A groove-like connection groove portion that is inserted in a possible state, and the second guided portion is inserted into the connection groove portion so that the driven member is rotatable and slidable in the driven member. A gaming machine B6 that is connected.

  According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the second groove portion is formed in the holding member, the second guided portion is formed in the driven member, and the second guided portion is the driven member. Since the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable and slidable state by being inserted into the connecting groove portion, the driven member is held by being guided by the second groove portion to the second guided portion. Both the role of defining the displacement with respect to the member and the role of connecting the driven member to the driven member so as to be relatively displaceable by being inserted through the connection groove portion can be combined. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced to reduce the product cost, and the structure can be simplified to improve the reliability and durability of the movable member.

  In the gaming machine B6, at least a portion where the second groove portion is formed is interposed between the driven member and the driven member, and the driven member is the second groove portion of the holding member. The gaming machine B7 is provided with a contact portion that is in contact with a peripheral edge of the second guide portion, and the contact portion is formed in a concentric circular shape with the second guided portion.

  According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine B6, the driven member includes a contact portion that is in contact with the peripheral edge of the second groove portion of the holding member, and the contact portion is a second guided portion. The contact area between the contact part and the holding part (periphery of the second groove part) even when the driven member is rotated with respect to the holding member (second groove part). It is possible to suppress the support reaction force from changing. As a result, the driven member can be displaced in a stable state.

  In any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the driven member can be displaced in accordance with the displacement of the driven member. The game machine B8 is formed so as to be capable of holding the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B7, the holding member can be displaced by the driving force of the driving means, and the displacement of the driven member can be reduced. Accordingly, the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are formed so as to be able to be held in a state in which the driven member is displaceable, so that one device in which the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member are held by the holding member. As a unit. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost when assembling the unit itself and the manufacturing cost when assembling the gaming machine by assembling the unit to the gaming machine main body.

  In the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member, and the first guided portion is formed in a driven member.

  According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B8, the first groove portion is formed in the holding member and the first guided portion is formed in the driven member, so that the first groove portion is formed. It is easy to secure space. That is, a space for forming the first groove portion is made by using the dead space of the holding member that must be formed in a relatively large outer shape in order to hold the driving means, the driven member, and the driven member into a unit. It can be secured. Thereby, the outline (shape) of a 1st groove part and the freedom degree of extension length can be increased, and the variation of the change which can be provided to the aspect of a displacement can be increased correspondingly.

  In the gaming machine B9, the displacement defining means includes a second groove portion formed in a groove shape in the holding member, and a second guided portion formed in the driven member while being guided along the second groove portion. The holding member includes a first facing portion and a second facing portion that face each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion or the second facing portion. And the second groove portion is formed on the other of the first facing portion and the second facing portion.

  According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B9, the first groove portion is formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion of the holding member facing each other with the driven member interposed therebetween, and the other Since the second groove portion is formed, the first groove portion and the second groove portion can be formed without considering the formation position of the counterpart. That is, when both the first groove portion and the second groove portion are formed in one of the first facing portion and the second facing portion, it is necessary to form the first groove portion and the second groove portion so as not to intersect with each other. The degree of freedom is limited. On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B10, in both the first groove portion and the second groove portion, its contour (shape) and extension length can be set without considering the positional relationship with the opponent, The degree of freedom can be increased, and the variation of the change that can be given to the displacement mode can be increased accordingly.

  In any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the gaming machine B11 is characterized in that at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a radius at a starting end or a terminal end larger than a reference value.

  According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, in the initial stage of starting the driving of the driven member in the stopped state, the load is reduced and the driving is smoothly performed. Can be started.

  Any one of the gaming machines B5 to B7 includes a shielding member that shields the driven member invisible, and at least one of the first groove and the second groove has a portion of the driven member outside the area of the shielding member. The gaming machine B12 is characterized in that a radius in a corresponding region is made smaller than a reference value during a period from when the entire driven member is exposed outside the region of the shielding member until the driven member starts to be exposed.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B5 to B7, the movement of the driven member can be accelerated in a range where a part of the driven member is shielded. An effect in which the member suddenly appears and an effect in which the driven member is quickly hidden by the shielding member can be performed.
<Concept of Invention with Rotation Operation Unit 600 as an Example>
A holding member; a first rotating body and a second rotating body that are rotatably disposed on the holding member; and a driving unit that applies a rotational driving force to the first rotating body and the second rotating body. In the gaming machine, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape, and is fitted on the first rotating body concentrically.

  Here, there is a game machine such as a pachinko machine that produces an effect by rotating a plurality of rotating bodies (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011-30847 (see, for example, paragraph 0162, FIGS. 42 to 46)). According to this gaming machine, a plurality of rotating bodies arranged apart from each other on the left and right are rotated in synchronization in the same direction to give a sense of unity to the effects. However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since a plurality of rotating bodies are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, it is difficult for the player to recognize the rotations associated with each other, and by rotating the plurality of rotating bodies. There was a problem that the effect of the production could not be fully exhibited. The gaming machine C1 is made in order to solve the above-described problems, and makes it easy for the player to recognize the rotations of the plurality of rotating bodies by associating the rotations of the rotating bodies with each other. It aims at providing the gaming machine which can fully exhibit the effect of.

  That is, according to the gaming machine C1, the second rotating body is formed in an annular shape and is externally fitted concentrically with the first rotating body, so that the first rotating body and the second rotating body are connected to each other. Can be rotated concentrically. Accordingly, the rotation of the first rotator and the rotation of the second rotator can be associated with each other so that the player can easily recognize them, and as a result, the effect of rendering by rotating each of the plurality of rotators can be sufficiently exhibited. Can do.

  In the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, the gaming machine C2.

  According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, so that an effect member or the like can be disposed on the inner peripheral side of the first rotating body. Thus, it is possible to produce an effect of rotating the first rotating body surrounding the periphery of the effect member and the second rotating body surrounding the periphery of the first rotating body around the effect member. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body includes a main body portion that is inserted through the holding member, a one-side flange portion that projects outwardly in a flange shape on one axial side of the main body portion, and one of them. A second flange that projects outwardly on the other side in the axial direction opposite to the side flange, and is opposed to the first flange with the holding member interposed therebetween. A gaming machine C3, which is externally fitted to a main body portion of the first rotating body and is disposed between a one-side flange portion of the first rotating body and a holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1 or C2, the first rotating body is formed and held on the main body portion inserted through the holding member and on one side and the other side of the main body portion in the axial direction. A second flange that is externally fitted to the main body of the first rotor, and the one flange and the holding member of the first rotor. Therefore, the holding structure of the first rotating body and the second rotating body by the holding member can be simplified.

  That is, according to the above configuration, since the main body portion of the first rotating body is inserted through the holding member, the first rotating body can be rotatably held by the holding member. Further, the other side flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, so that the displacement of the first rotating body in one axial direction can be restricted, and the one side flange portion of the first rotating body performs the second rotation. The displacement of the first rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the body and the second rotating body contacting the holding member.

  Furthermore, since the 2nd rotary body is externally fitted by the main-body part of a 1st rotary body, a 2nd rotary body can be rotatably hold | maintained to a holding member via the main-body part of a 1st rotary body. Further, the second rotating body is brought into contact with one side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the other flange portion of the first rotating body is brought into contact with the holding member, whereby one axial direction of the second rotating body is made. The displacement of the second rotating body in the other axial direction can be regulated by contacting the second rotating body with the holding member.

  The gaming machine C3 includes a first gear and a second gear which are disposed on the holding member and transmit the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively, and the first rotation A gaming machine C4, wherein the body and the second rotating body are respectively provided with gears meshed with the first gear and the second gear on the outer peripheral surface.

  According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C3, the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member and transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body, respectively. The first and second rotating bodies are provided with gears that are meshed with the first gear and the second gear, respectively, on the outer peripheral surface. Thus, the structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be simplified. In particular, when the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape and a production member or the like is disposed on the inner peripheral side of the main body portion, the first gear is provided on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. And the structure engaged with the second gear is effective.

  In the gaming machine C4, the second gear is disposed on one side of the holding member, and the first gear is disposed on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. Is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. A gaming machine C5 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4, the second gear is arranged on one side of the holding member and the first gear is arranged on the other side of the holding member opposite to the one side. The first gear is meshed with a gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the other side flange portion of the first rotating body, and the second gear is engaged with the gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body. For example, the first gear and the second gear are compared with the case where the first gear and the second gear are respectively meshed with the first rotating body and the second rotating body on one side of the holding member. The structure for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first rotating body and the second rotating body via the gear can be simplified.

  Further, the first gear and the other side flange portion of the first rotating body with which the first gear is engaged are arranged with the one side flange portion and main body portion of the first rotating body and the second rotating body. By being arranged on the other side opposite to the one side of the holding member, the player can view the one side of the holding member from the front side with the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body. It can be shielded by the holding member. That is, the structure that shields the first gear and the other flange portion of the first rotating body from being invisible can be simplified using the holding member.

  In either the gaming machine C4 or C5, first transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear, and second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the second gear. And a gaming machine C6.

  According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C4 or C5, the first transmission means and the second transmission means for transmitting the rotational driving force of the driving means to the first gear and the second gear, respectively, are provided. The one rotating body and the second rotating body can be rotated by one driving means. In this case, the rotational driving force of the driving means can be transmitted to the first gear by the first transmission means and to the second gear by the second transmission means by different transmission paths. Therefore, for example, by setting the number of gears and the reduction ratio for each transmission path, even if the two rotating bodies are rotated by one driving means, the two rotating bodies (first rotation) The rotation modes of the body and the second rotating body) can be varied. As a result, the effect of rotating the plurality of rotating bodies can be more effectively performed.

  In any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes toward the one side, and the first member is provided on an inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. A gaming machine C7, wherein the main body portion of the rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C4 to C6, the holding member includes a cylindrical portion that is formed in a cylindrical shape and protrudes to one side, and the cylindrical shape of the holding member Since the main body portion of the first rotating body is rotatably disposed on the inner peripheral side of the portion and the second rotating body is rotatably disposed on the outer peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member, the second rotating body is disposed on the holding member. It can be externally fitted to the main body portion of the first rotating body via the cylindrical portion. That is, not only the first rotating body but also the second rotating body can be held by the holding member. Thereby, since the arrangement positions of the first rotating body and the second rotating body can be defined with reference to the holding members, gears engraved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, The positional relationship between the first gear and the second gear disposed on the holding member can be defined with reference to the holding member. Therefore, it is possible to stabilize the engagement between the gears carved on the outer peripheral surfaces of the first rotating body and the second rotating body, the first gear, and the second gear. As a result, it is possible to suppress uneven wear of the gears and suppress drive resistance.

  In the gaming machine C7, the first rotating body includes a plurality of protruding portions that protrude from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion, extend in the axial direction of the main body portion, and are scattered at predetermined intervals in the circumferential direction. A gaming machine C8 characterized by comprising.

  According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C7, the main body portion of the first rotating body protrudes from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion, and has a predetermined interval in the circumferential direction. Since the plurality of projecting portions that are scattered apart are provided, the contact region between the main body portion of the first rotating body and the cylindrical portion of the holding member is limited to the projecting portion, and the main body portion of the first rotating body is It can be smoothly rotated on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member.

  In addition, it is preferable that a protrusion part is curved by the circular arc shape from which the shape of the cross section cut | disconnected by the plane orthogonal to the axial direction of a main-body part becomes convex outward. The contact area between the inner surface of the cylindrical portion of the holding member can be suppressed, and the main body portion of the first rotating body can be rotated more smoothly on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion of the holding member. It is.

  In the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body projects from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion and extends in the axial direction of the main body portion. A gaming machine C9, comprising a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at the same phase as the protrusions.

  According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C8, the main body portion of the first rotating body is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the first rotating body protrudes from the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion, and the axial direction of the main body portion And a plurality of inner protrusions disposed at a position that is in phase with the protrusions (that is, on the back side of the region where the protrusions are formed). When molding with a resin mold, the shape of the main body portion of the first rotating body can be made uniform (symmetrical shape) on the outer peripheral surface side and the inner peripheral surface side to ensure the moldability. .

  In the gaming machine C9, in the first rotating body, the main body portion is divided in the axial direction, the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are fastened to positions corresponding to the protruding portions. A gaming machine C10 characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the first rotating body has the main body portion divided in the axial direction, and the divided portions are fastened and fixed by screws, and the screws are protruding portions. In other words, since the projecting portion also serves as a screw fastening portion for fastening the screw, the strength of the screw fastening portion can be ensured.

  In any one of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position that overlaps at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body when viewed from the front, and is configured to emit light. A gaming machine C11 comprising a light emitting means.

  According to the gaming machine C11, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, one side of the holding member is disposed at a position overlapping with at least one rotation locus of the first rotating body or the second rotating body in a front view. Since the light emitting means is provided, when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated concentrically, the light emitted by the light emitting means is played on the rotation locus of at least one of the first rotating body or the second rotating body. Can be visually recognized. That is, it is possible to perform an effect of rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body at positions overlapping with light emission by the light emitting means, and as a result, an effect of rotating each of the plurality of rotating bodies more effectively. It can be carried out.

  In the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body includes a first portion in which the light emitting means is formed in a region where a rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view and the first portion. The gaming machine C12 is characterized in that the second portions where the light emitting means are formed invisible are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction.

  According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C11, at least one of the first rotating body and the second rotating body has the light emitting means visible in a region where the rotation locus overlaps the light emitting means in a front view. Since the first part to be formed and the second part in which the light emitting means cannot be visually recognized are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated when the first rotating body and the second rotating body are rotated. As the portion and the second portion alternately pass in front of the light emitting means, the player can intermittently visually recognize the light emitted from the light emitting means. That is, while rotating the first rotating body and the second rotating body, it is possible to perform an effect of associating intermittent light emission of the light emitting means with the rotation, and as a result, an effect of rotating a plurality of rotating bodies, respectively. Can be performed more effectively.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Above all, the basic configuration of the slot machine is “equipped with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and for operating the starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. The game machine is provided with special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, examples of the game media include coins and medals.

  One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and a ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in an operation port disposed at a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner so that a ball can be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is obtained. Examples include those to which values (including data written on magnetic cards as well as premium balls) are given.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A8, B1 to B10, and C1 to C12, wherein the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the merged gaming machine includes “a variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to the operation of the identification information, the change of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. Special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stoppage is specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium, and the identification information The game machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required at the start of the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, for example, the liquid crystal display device displays from the overhanging position that is the front surface of the liquid crystal display device and the overhanging position by the driving force from the driving means. There is known a gaming machine that produces an effect by displacing a displacement member between a retreat position and a retreat position that is retreated in a direction that is outside the area (Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-200990 (for example, paragraph 0095, 11 to 15))). According to this gaming machine, a change is imparted to the displacement mode of the displacement member by switching the output direction of the driving means or making the output intermittent.
However, since the conventional gaming machine described above is configured to change the output of the driving means, there is a problem that the control is complicated, while the displacement member is displaced according to the change in the output of the driving means. Since only the speed is changed and the displacement direction remains constant, there is a problem that a sufficient change is not given to the mode of displacement.
This technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of giving a change to the displacement mode of the displacement member while keeping the output of the driving means constant. And
<Means>
To achieve this object, the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 includes a driving unit that generates a driving force, a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit, and the driven member. A holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner, and a driven member that is connected to the driven member in a displaceable manner, and a displacement defining means that regulates the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. The displacement defining means regulates the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member, so that the driven member is moved relative to the driven member when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means. Relative displacement.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, wherein the displacement defining means includes a first groove part formed in a groove shape in one of the driven member or the holding member, and the first groove part. And a first guided portion formed on the other of the driven member or the holding member.
The gaming machine described in the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable state.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, when the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving unit, the displacement defining unit defines the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member. With the displacement of the member, the driven member can be driven while being displaced relative to the driven member. That is, even when the driven member is displaced along a linear or arc-shaped fixed track, for example, the driven member can be displaced along a track different from the driven member. Moreover, since the change of the displacement mode is formed by the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member, even if the driven member is displaced at a constant speed, it is different from the driven member. The driven member can be displaced along the track. Therefore, it is possible to change the displacement mode of the driven member while keeping the output of the driving means constant.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the displacement defining means includes the first groove part and the first guided part, and the first along the first groove part. By guiding the guided portion, the displacement of the driven member relative to the holding member can be defined. Therefore, the driven member is displaced by being driven by the driving force of the driving means, so that the relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be formed according to the outline (shape) of the first groove portion. That is, by setting the outline (shape) of the first groove portion, the mode of relative displacement of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be arbitrarily set. As described above, since the displacement defining means is constituted by the groove-shaped part (first groove part) and the part guided by the part (first guided part), the structure is simplified and the product cost is reduced. At the same time, the reliability and durability of the movable part can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect achieved by the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the driven member is connected to the driven member at least in a rotatable state. When the driven member is relatively displaced in accordance with the displacement of the member, the relative angle of the driven member with respect to the driven member can be changed, and the player can recognize a strong change in impression as a change in the displacement mode. be able to.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
60 Base plate (front member)
86 Center frame (front member)
410 Case body (holding member)
420 Drive motor (drive means)
431 Pinion gear (part of transmission means)
432 Intermediate gear (part of transmission means)
433 Crank gear (part of transmission means, rotating member)
440 Base displacement member (part of displacement member)
444 Second slide hole (slide groove)
450 Relative displacement member (part of displacement member)
453 Slide pin (pin member)
460 Connecting rod (part of transmission means, link member)
480 Decoration member 510 Front case body (part of holding means , first member, shielding member)
513 1st guide groove (1st groove part, a part of displacement regulation means)
523 Second guide groove (second groove, part of displacement regulating means)
520 Rear case body (part of holding means , second member, shielding member)
530 Drive motor (drive means)
550 Driven member 552a Connection groove (connection groove, part of displacement regulating means)
560 Follower (displacement member)
561a First pin (first guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
561b Connection shaft (second guided portion, part of displacement defining means)
563a Contact surface (contact portion)
610 Front case body (part of holding member)
612 Cylindrical part 620 Rear case body (part of holding member)
630 Drive motor (drive means)
631 Pinion gear (part of first transmission means, part of second transmission means)
641 1st storage gear (a part of 1st transmission means, a part of 2nd transmission means)
642 Second storage gear (first gear)
643 Third storage gear (part of second transmission means)
644 Fourth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
645 fifth storage gear (part of second transmission means)
646 Front gear (second gear)
650 First Rotating Body 651 Main Body 651a First Projection (Part of Projection, Inner Projection)
651b Second protrusion (part of protrusion, inner protrusion)
652 Front effect part (one side flange part, first part and second part)
653 Storage flange (flange on the other side)
653a First outer peripheral gear (gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the first rotating body)
660 Second rotating body 661a Second outer peripheral gear (gear engraved on the outer peripheral surface of the second rotating body)
670 Spherical liquid crystal device (production member)
682 Light emitting element (light emitting means)

Claims (3)

In a gaming machine comprising: a driving unit that generates a driving force; a driven member that is driven and displaced by the driving force generated by the driving unit; and a holding member that holds the driven member in a displaceable manner.
A driven member connected to the driven member so as to be displaceable, and a displacement defining means for defining a displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member,
By defining the displacement of the driven member with respect to the holding member by the displacement defining means, when the driven member is displaced by the driving force of the driving means, the driven member is relative to the driven member. A gaming machine characterized by being relatively displaced.   The displacement defining means includes a first groove formed in a groove shape on one of the driven member or the holding member, and a first groove formed on the other of the driven member or the holding member while being guided along the first groove. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a guided portion.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the driven member is connected to the driven member in a rotatable state.

Images